Home

Avaya 4600 Series IP Telephone Administrator's Guide

1. 2 220004 Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones 2 2 4 9 Administering the Thin Client Directories Administration Alternatives and Options for 4600 Series IP Telephones 52 Apache Web Servers Configuring for Backup Restore 75 Apache Web Servers configuring for Backup Restore 75 Application File and Upgrade Script Choosing 78 Application Files and Scripts for 4600 Series IP Telephones snora es Gee a ee aren ak 76 Application Status Flag APPSTAT 121 Application Status Flag APPSTAT for 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW Index IP Telephones 1 sonaa nuaa 121 Applications oaoa a a 40 Avaya 46xx IP Telephone MIB 151 Avaya Communication Manager Software Release NT oi ae aE e E Se ee aaa i Aia 55 Avaya File Server Application 72 B Backup Restore for 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones 123 Backup Restore HTTP Configuration 74 Backup Restore Configuring IIS Web Servers 74 Backup Restore for 4630 4630SW 116 Cc Call Log Archive for 4630 4630SW 117 Choosing the Right Application File and Upgrade Script File a 25 s a ide a a ae Se ees ee es 78 Clear Administrative Option 132 Click to Dial Functionality 2 166 Configuration and Installation Suggestions for 42 Conventions Used in This Guide
2. SET SYSLANG English H HHHHH 46xx Automatic Backup Restore Settings HH RESTORESTAT enables disables the automatic backup and restore of user data Applies to both FTP and HTTP backup restore This setting does not apply to the 4602 sets HE A value of 1 enables Backup Restore A value of 0 disables Backup Restore FTPUSERSTAT sets user permissions on modifications to server names and directory paths used for FTP backup restore Does not apply to HTTP backup restore HH When FTPUSERSTAT is set to 0 the user can only use the server and path data administered via DHCP or settings file When FTPUSERSTAT is set to 1 the user can specify alternative FTP servers or directory paths The default is 1 194 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction When FTPUSERSTAT is set to 2 the user can specify alternative FTP directory paths but is not allowed to specify alternative FTP servers HH FTPSRVR specifies the IP Address of the default FTP Server May be a dotted decimal address or DNS string Depending on FTPUSERSTAT setting may be overridden by the user FTPDIR specifies the default directory path used for storage and retrieval of phone user information Depending on FTPUSERSTAT setting may be overridden by the user HH SET RESTORESTAT 1 SET FTPUSERSTAT 1 SET FTPS
3. but valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS format separated by commas without intervening spaces to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters SET EXCHANGE_SERVER_LIST example For additional Exchange related settings see the CONTACTS SETTINGS section HH HHH HHH HAHAH CODEC SETTINGS 4 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE H G 711a Codec Enabled Determines whether G 711 a law codec is available on the phone Ofor No 1 for Yes SET ENABLE _G711A 1 HH G 711u Codec Enabled Determines whether G 711 mu law codec is available on the phone Ofor No 1 for Yes SET ENABLE_G711U 1 HH G 729 Codec Enabled Determines whether G 729 codec is available on the phone 0 for G 729 A disabled 1 for G729 A enabled without Annex B support 2 for G729 A enabled with Annex B support SET ENABLE_G729 1 G 726 Codec Enabled Determines whether G 726 codec is available on the phone OforNo 1 for Yes SET ENABLE_G726 1 oa Ha Issue 7 October 2007 207 Sample Upgrade Script File G 726 Payload Type Specifies the RTP payload type to be used with the G 726 codec 96 127 SET G726_PAYLOAD_TYPE 110 G 722 Codec Enabled Determines whether G 722 codec is available on the phone OforNo 1 for Yes SET ENABLE_G722 0 HH DTMF Payload Type Specifies the RTP p
4. 12 Document Organization 11 E Enhanced Dialing Procedures 111 Enhanced Local Dialing 111 Error Conditions 0000 125 Error Messages s cce moa e ae w a a e i a aa 140 F File Server Application 72 File Serveis s 2 e adoa a tom Aoma daa ai aa 32 File Servers and DHCP Administration 56 G GROUP System Value 81 H H 323 and SIP Administering on the same network 54 Hardware Requirements 47 HTTP ed a ee eed eas a ae ee i a G 20 73 HTTP Configuration for Backup Restore 74 HTTP Generic Setup gt sa aa sa ee raa 73 l IEEE 8021X c m iocar ee scar aua pe a 92 IETF Documents aooo 21 IIS Web Servers configuring for Backup Restore 74 Initialization and Address Resolution 39 Initialization Process for 4600 Series IP Telephones 34 Installation and Configuration Suggestions for 42 Installation Network Information Required before installing lt e ssor ee 57 Intended Audience nonoa oaoa a a a 10 IP Address Lists and Station Number Portability 43 ISO IEC ANSI IEEE Documents 24 ITU Documents 2 a ee ee 23 L Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 94 LLDP Data Units Transmitted 95 M Media Server Field Names and Corresponding Script File Parameter Names is MIB for 46XX IP Telephones 151 N NAT a se 8 4
5. 16 Creating Web Sites for Other 4600 Series IP Telephones m s me i a aa a a e e a a a 169 Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone a a a ee ee aa 153 Browser Features and Behavior 154 Click to Dial Functionality 166 Design Guidelines 22 163 General Background 154 Customer Support 0 24 Customizing 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones 118 4630 4630SW IP Telephone 113 Site Specific Option Number SSON 110 System Parameters for 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones 2 2 eee ee eee 118 System Parameters for 4630 4630SW IP Telephones 2 ee ee ee ee 11 Issue 7 October 2007 245 Index D Date and Time Setting on SIP IP Telephones DEFINITY Releases 9 9 5 and10 59 Delay and Jitter o ao a a 26 DHCP and File Server Administration 56 DHCP and File Servers 0 32 DHCP and VolP oaoa aaa 27 DHCP Configuration Choosing 58 DHCP Generic Setup 2 04 59 DHCP S rver a osa a acata ee a ee ee 32 DHCP Server Setup 2 2 ee eee 58 DHCP Server Windows 2000 Setup 67 DHCP Server Windows NT 4 0 Setup 63 DHCP Software Alternatives 0 58 Dial Plan Setting on SIP IP Telephones 112 DNS Addressing o oaoa aa a 110 Document Change History
6. HHHHHH H These settings affect certain dialing behaviors such as dialing numbers from the incoming Call Log or from web pages H Dialing Algorithm Status Controls whether algorithm defined by parameters in this section is used during certain dialing behaviors 0 disables algorithm 1 enables algorithm but not for Contacts 2 enables algorithm including Contacts 96xx SIP only SET ENHDIALSTAT 1 H Country Code For United States the value is 1 SET PHNCC 1 H Internal extension number length If your extension is 12345 your dial plan length is 5 On 46xx phones the maximum extension length is 10 On 96xx phones the maximum extension length is 13 This value must match the extension length set on your call server SET PHNDPLENGTH 5 H International access code For the United States the value is 011 SET PHNIC 011 H Long distance access code SET PHNLD 1 H National telephone number Length For example 800 555 1111 has a length of 10 SET PHNLDLENGTH 10 H Outside line access code The number you press to make an outside call SET PHNOL 9 178 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction HHHHHHHHHHHHHE APPLICATION ACCESS SETTINGS HHHHHHH These settings restrict access to certain applications APPSTAT is not supported on 96xx SIP phones HH When
7. 802 1X Pass Through and Proxy Logoff As of Release 2 2 3 IP telephones support pass through of 802 1x packets to and from an attached PC This enables an attached PC running 802 1x supplicant software to be authenticated by an Ethernet data switch As of Release 2 6 and as of Release 2 7 for the 4625SW the IP Telephones support two pass through modes e pass through and e pass through with proxy logoff The DOT1X parameter setting controls the pass through mode In Proxy Logoff mode DOT1X 1 when the secondary Ethernet interface loses link integrity the telephone sends an 802 1X EAPOL Logoff message to the data switch on behalf of the attached PC The message alerts the switch that the device is no longer present For example a message would be sent when the attached PC is physically disconnected from the IP telephone When DOT1X 0 or 2 the Proxy Logoff function is not supported 802 1X Supplicant Operation As of Release 2 7 the 4602SW and 4625SW IP Telephones support Supplicant operation As of Release 2 6 the 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW and 4622SW IP Telephones support Supplicant operation IP telephones that support Supplicant operation also support Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP but only with the MD5 Challenge authentication method as specified in IETF RFC 3748 8 5 33a A Supplicant identity ID and password of no more than 12 numeric characters are stored in reprogrammable non volatile memory The ID an
8. 97 Troubleshooting the 4601 IP Telephone 147 Troubleshooting Guidelines 125 U UDP TCP Port Utilization 202 36 Unnamed Registration 92 Upgrade Script and Application File Choosing the Right e a a ee i ap Sa a a A 78 Upgrade Script contents of 80 175 V View Administrative Option o oo oaa 137 VLAN Considerations osoo a 89 VLAN Detection a oaoa oaoa a 89 VLAN Separation a aoa oa a 80 90 VLAN Separation Rules o oo a 91 VLAN Separation Option 176 aoaaa aa 61 VLAN Tagging a aaa a 89 Voice over IP See VolP naaa aaa aa 25 VOIRA abcd w ae de a a eR a whee i 25 Delay and Jitter oa a a a a ee eee 26 DHCP gt ma u aoaaa ee Ew a a A 27 H 323 Standard aoaaa 27 IP Address Lists and Station Number Portability 43 NAT go ee ale at ke a we es 29 Network Assessment 0 31 Overview Voice over IP and Network Protocols 25 QOS 8 ee a ie fe a a a T 29 Reliability and Performance 42 SOCUMLY sc a ee Me ed ee E a 44 SNMP 2 2 0 00000 022 eae 30 Tandem Coding 27 W Web Sites for Other 4600 Series IP Telephones 169 Web Sites Creating for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone ia a sor eae ae ew ae 153 What s New 2 2 eee eee eee 13 Issue 7 October 2007 247 Index 248 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide
9. HHHHHH FREE AREER AEE EAE EAE AEE EE AE EE EE A A a SETTINGS4621 FERRE AREER AEE EAE EAE AE ERE EE AE EE A A H This section contains the phone model specific settings for the 4621 telephone H 7H EE AUDIO SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH H Headset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the headset H setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL 7 six levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL Issue 7 October 2007 223 Sample Upgrade Script File 9 two levels louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHD 0 Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the handset 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL HH 7 six levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL 9 two levels louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHS 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH WML BROWSER SETTINGS 44HHHHHHHHHHHHHE The WMLHOME setting is used to enable and administer the Web Application The WMLIDLEURI setting acts as an
10. Select option 003 from the Unused Options list Click the Add button Click the OK button Select the Global parameter under DHCP Options Select the 176 option that you created from the Unused Options list Click the Add button Click the OK button _ O O DAN Oo fF W PD _h Activating the Leases Use the following procedure to activate the leases 1 Click Activate under the Scope menu The light bulb icon for the scope lights Verifying Your Configuration This section describes how to verify that the 46XXOPTIONSs are correctly configured for the Windows NT 4 0 DHCP server Verify the Default Option 176 46XXOPTION Use the following procedure to verify the default option 1 Select Start gt Programs gt Admin Tools gt DHCP Manager 2 Expand Local Machine in the DHCP servers window by double clicking until the sign changes to a sign In the DHCP servers frame click the scope for the IP telephone Select Defaults from the DHCP_Options menu In the Option Name pull down list select 176 46XXOPTION Verify that the Value String box contains the correct string from DHCP Software Alternatives on page 58 O oa A O If not update the string and click the OK button twice 66 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide DHCP Verify the Scope Option 176 46XXOPTION Use the following procedure to verify the scope option 1 Select Scope under DHCP OPTIONS 2 In the Activ
11. lt acronym gt indicates an acronym The enclosed text is shown in an italic font lt cite gt indicates a bibliographic citation or reference The enclosed text is shown in an italic font lt code gt indicates source code of a program The enclosed text is shown in a monospaced font lt del gt indicates deleted text It shows editorial markup A line is drawn through enclosed text Issue 7 October 2007 155 Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone e lt dfn gt indicates a definition for a term This is usually used with the first appearance of a term in a document The enclosed text is shown in an italic font e lt em gt indicates emphasis on a string of text This is the contextual equivalent of using the lt i gt italic tag The enclosed text is shown in an italic font e lt ins gt indicates inserted text It shows editorial markup The enclosed text is shown underlined e lt kbd gt indicates keyboard input This is similar to the lt code gt tag but with a different contextual intent The enclosed text is shown in a monospaced font e lt Samp gt indicates literal text The enclosed text is shown in a monospaced font e lt strong gt indicates emphasis on some text but in a stronger contextual sense than the lt em gt tag This is the contextual equivalent of using the lt b gt bold tag The enclosed text is shown in a bold font e lt var gt indicates source code variables This is
12. lt thead gt defines a set of table header rows The intent of this tag is to provide a set of header rows for each printed page While viewing the page in a browser the header has no more effect than the lt th gt tag What it provides for the designer is a more logical breakout of the data The table s header area is easily recognizable since it appears between the lt thead gt start and end tags lt tbody gt defines the main body of a table when used with the lt thead gt and lt tfoot gt tags 158 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Browser Features and Behavior e lt tfoot gt defines a footer for a table This tag can contain multiple rows Like the lt thead gt tag the intent of this tag is to provide a set of footer rows for each printed page Viewing the page in a browser has no additional effect And like the lt thead gt tag this tag provides a logical breakout of the data for the designer e lt colgroup gt defines a column group It can be used as a single definition of identical columns or as a container for dissimilar columns The span attribute defines what columns are parts of each group e lt col gt controls the appearance of one or more columns within a column group Images The 4630 IP Telephone Web Browser handles both GIF and JPEG image formats No other image formats included animated GIFs are supported Note that images take up a large amount of memory compared to text and that
13. 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 one level softer than NORMAL 2 two levels softer than NORMAL 3 three levels softer than NORMAL H 4 OFF inaudible 5 one level louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHS 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE WML BROWSER SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH The WMLHOME setting is used to enable and administer the Web Application WMLIDLEURI may be used as an idle screen when the phone has been idle for WMLIDLETIME minutes By default this URL is NULL and this screen is not activated NOTES The WMLIDELURI idle screen is different than the Avaya screen saver activated by the SCREENSAVERON timer While it is possible to use WMLIDLEURI as an idle screen it is recommended that the SCREENSAVERON timer and the Avaya Screen Saver display be used for screen saver purposes Avaya hosts a web site for IP Phones The WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI parameters are set up to point your IP telephones to this hosted site To enable access to this site remove the from the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDLEURI lines To change the web site that your phones point to replace the provided URL in the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDELURI lines with the URL of your site SET WMLHOME http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 9600 home wml SET WMLIDLEURI http www mycompany com my_screen wml Issue 7 Oc
14. CNA port Sets the port used for CNA registration 0 65535 The default is 50002 SET CNAPORT 50002 H H HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE ETHERNET INTERFACES HHHHHHHHHHHH H Primary Interface Status Controls the speed and duplex settings for the primary Ethernet interface 1 for auto negotiate 2 for 10Mbps half duplex 3 for 10Mbps full duplex 4 for 100Mbps half duplex 5 for 100Mbps full duplex 6 for 1Gbps full duplex 96xx phones only SET PHY1STAT 1 H PC Interface Status Controls the speed and duplex settings for the PC Ethernet interface 0 for disabled 1 for auto negotiate 2 for 10Mbps half duplex 3 for 10Mbps full duplex 4 for 100Mbps half duplex 5 for 100Mbps full duplex 6 for 1Gbps full duplex 96xx phones only SET PHY2STAT 1 H HHHHHHHHHHHHHAHHHH 802 1P Q SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH H Telephone Frame Tagging Controls whether layer 2 frames generated by the Issue 7 October 2007 183 Sample Upgrade Script File telephone have IEEE 802 1Q tags 0 for Auto 1 for On and 2 for Off For H 323 phones this parameter may also be changed via LLDP SET L2Q 0 VLAN Separation Controls whether layer 2 frames to from the telephone s secondary Ethernet interface have their 802 1Q tags changed 0 for do not change tags 1 for change tags SET VLANSEP 0 HH Voice VLAN Identifier
15. for the United States 44 for the United Kingdom etc e PHNDPLENGTH the length of the dial plan on the media server e PHNIC the digits the media server dials to access public network international trunks For example 011 for the United States e PHNLD the digit dialed to access public network long distance trunks on the media server e PHNLDLENGTH the maximum length in digits of the national telephone number for the country in which the Avaya Media Server is located e PHNOL the character s dialed to access public network local trunks on the media server Issue 7 October 2007 111 Server Administration Example A corporate voice network has a 4 digit dialing plan The corporate WML Web site lists a 4 digit telephone number as a link on the Human Resources page A 4620 user selects that link The 4620 deduces the telephone number is part of the corporate network because the telephone number s length is the same as the corporate dialing plan The telephone dials the number without further processing Example A user notes a Web site contains an international telephone number that needs to be called and presses Call The 4630 4630SW determines the number to be called is from another country code The telephone then prepends the rest of the telephone number with PHNOL to get an outside line PHNIC to get an international trunk The 4630 4630SW then dials normally with the Avaya Media Server routing t
16. General User Parameters APPSTAT 1 Optional Applications status flag See The Application Status Flag APPSTAT on page 121 fora description See Table 13 for the range of values FTPDIR Null Optional FTP Server Directory The path on the FTP server to the directory in which an FTP backup restore is saved 1 of 4 118 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Customizing 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones Table 12 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Status Description and Value Range FTPUSERSTAT 1 Optional FTP User Permission If set to O the user cannot specify alternatives to the FTP servers and FTP directories DHCP and or TFTP HTTP administration specify If set to 1 the user can specify alternatives to the FTP servers and FTP directories that DHCP and or TFTP HTTP administration specify If set to 2 the user cannot specify alternatives to the FTP servers that DHCP and or TFTP HTTP administration specify but can specify alternatives to FTP Directories PUSHCAP 222 Push capabilities audio receive push value hundreds Web push value tens or Top Line value Any values other than combinations of 0 1 and or 2 are treated as 0 disabled Values are 000 to 999 defined as 0 Push disabled 1 Normal only push allowed 2 Normal and or barge on
17. Operating System selected a new port is used for each file requested Port 1024 5000 Operating System selected Port 68 TCP UDP Port Utilization gt DHCP UDP IP gt Port 67 DHCP Server gt HTTPS TCP IP lt 4601 4601 4602 4602SW 4602SW 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW amp 4625SW gt HTTPS Server BB Port 411 HTTP TCP IP 4601 4601 4602 4602SW 4602SW 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW amp 4625SW gt i Port 80 81 on CM HTTP Server R 28 HTTPPORT value gt TFTP Read Request UDP IP ai lt TFTP Data ACKs amp Errors UDP IP E TFTP Server F Port 69 Port Operating System selected a new port is used for each file transferred gt DNS UDP IP lt a Port 53 DNS Server Issue 7 October 2007 39 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols Figure 3 Applications Diagram Applications 4600 Series IP Telephone gt Directory Server Port 1024 5000 gum a LDAP TCP IP Port 389 or as set by Operating System 4630 only d DIRLDAPPORT selected only active if DIRSRVR is non null Port 1024 5000 ene ee Web or Proxy Server Operating System I a gt Port Usually 80 for Web selected only active if 4610SW 4620 4620SW servers an
18. To 8 DNS server address es If applicable 9 HTTP server address es If applicable 10 HTTPS TLS server If applicable address es The file server file path is the root directory the server uses for all transfers This is the default directory all files will be uploaded to or downloaded from In configurations where the upgrade script and application files are in the default directory do not use item 6 in Table 3 Required Network Information Before Installation Per DHCP Server on page 57 Issue 7 October 2007 57 Server Administration DHCP This section provides basic information on DHCP servers and generic information on DHCP server administration Choosing a DHCP Configuration A discussion on how to best set up your network to work with the 4600 Series IP Telephones is beyond the scope of this document See Network Assessment on page 31 This document concentrates on the simplest case of the single LAN segment Information provided here can be extrapolated for more complex LAN configurations CAUTION Before you start it is important that you understand your current network configuration An improper installation can cause network failures or reduce the reliability and performance of your network DHCP Software Alternatives Three DHCP software alternatives are common to Windows operating systems e Windows NT 4 0 DHCP Server e Windows 2000 DHCP Server e Windows 2003 DHCP Server Any o
19. this parameter must be set to 60 SET WAIT_FOR_REGISTRATION_TIMER 10 HH Subscription Request Duration Specifies the duration of initial SUBSCRIBE messages sent from the phone May be lowered by the server 60 31536000 seconds Maximum is one year default is one day SET OUTBOUND_SUBSCRIPTION_REQUEST_DURATION 86400 HH No Digits Timeout Specifies the number of seconds after going off hook that the phone waits to receive its first dialed digit If no digits are entered within the specified time period the phone plays a warning tone 1 60 SET NO_DIGITS_TIMEOUT 20 Inter Digit Timeout Specifies the number of seconds after the user dials a digit and before the phone sends out a SIP INVITE The expiration of this timer signifies the completion of the digit collection period 1 10 SET INTER_DIGIT_TIMEOUT 5 Failed Session Removal Timer Specifies the number of seconds the phone will play re order tone after an invalid extension has been dialed If this timer expires or if the user presses the End Call softkey the re order tone is stopped and the session line appearance is removed 5 999 SET FAILED_SESSION_REMOVAL_TIMER 30 TCP Keep Alive Enabled Determines whether or not the phone sends TCP keep alive TCP ACK messages 0 for No 210 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide 1 for Yes
20. 50 milliseconds off for 500 milliseconds followed by 500 milliseconds off until either the or button is pressed CAUSE Most likely the number of IP endpoints on the PBX is already at maximum Less likely network resource is unavailable RESOLUTION The telephone was attempting to access the PBX and was not successful Check the resource being called upon for availability If the resource appears operational and properly linked to the network verify addressing is accurate and that a two way telephone resource communication path exists Press to retry the process with the same values or to restart and enter the extension and password again System Error VISUAL INDICATION Message Waiting indicators at top of telephone and left middle of faceplate display a broken flutter continuously alternating 50 milliseconds on 50 milliseconds off for 500 milliseconds followed by 500 milliseconds off until either the or button is pressed CAUSE The PBX has an unspecified problem RESOLUTION Press to retry the process using the same values or to restart and re enter the extension and password Consult your Avaya Media Server administration and troubleshooting documentation Undefined VISUAL INDICATION Message Waiting indicators at top of telephone and imieie ie left middle of faceplate display a broken flutter continuously alternating 50 milliseconds on 50 milliseconds off for 500 milliseconds followed by 500 m
21. 7 8 DHCP Under Lease Duration select the Limited To option and set the lease duration to the maximum Enter a sensible name for the Name field such as DEFINITY IP Telephones Click OK A dialog box prompts you Activate the new scope now Click No Note Activate the scope only after setting all options Editing Custom Options Use the following procedure to edit custom options 1 ol Highlight the newly created scope 2 Select DHCP Options gt Defaults in the menu 3 4 Inthe Add Option Type dialog box enter an appropriate custom option name for example Click the New button A6XXOPTION Change the Data Type Byte value to String 6 Enter 176 in the Identifier field 7 Click the OK button The DHCP Options menu displays Select the Option Name for 176 and set the value string Click the OK button 10 11 12 For the Option Name field select 003 Router from the drop down list Click Edit Array Enter the Gateway IP Address recorded in Table 3 Required Network Information Before Installation Per DHCP Server for the New IP Address field Select Add and then OK Issue 7 October 2007 65 Server Administration Adding the DHCP Option Use the following procedure to add the DHCP option 1 Highlight the scope you just created Select Scope under DHCP Options Select the 176 option that you created from the Unused Options list Click the Add button
22. Applies to telephones with R 2 8 software O No change 1 11dB below nominal 2 no sidetone infinite loss 3 20dB below nominal 4 30dB below nominal 1 12dB above default Applies to telephones with R 2 8 3 software only 0 to 9 where each step is in the range of See Audio Quality Tuning for IP Telephones Issue 2 for up to date description The AUDIOSTHD system value Applies to telephones with R2 4 and later software releases except R2 5 0 No change 1 6dB below nominal 2 no sidetone infinite loss Applies to telephones with R 2 8 software only O No change 1 11dB below nominal 2 no sidetone infinite loss 3 20dB below nominal 4 30dB below nominal 1 12dB above default Applies to telephones with R 2 8 3 software only 0 to 9 where each step is in the range of 3 db See Audio Quality Tuning for IP Telephones Issue 2 0 for up to date description 3 of 3 Error Messages The 4600 Series IP Telephones issue messages in English only The IP telephones also display messages from the switch which outside the United States might issue messages in the local language Note Because the 4601 IP Telephone does not have a display it is limited in its ability to provide visual feedback and error messages Nonetheless some feedback is available and presented as applicable For more information see Table 18 Possible Error Messages During 4601 IP Telephone Installation or Operation on page 148 1
23. Attempting to do so renders the 4630 and 4630SW if Release 1 8 or greater set inoperable In addition if you are upgrading a 4630 from a release prior to Release 1 61 you must first upgrade to Release 1 61 Then you must upgrade to the newer Release You cannot upgrade directly from a pre 1 61 Release to a post 1 61 Release for the 4630 e For 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621 SW 4622SW 4625SW IP Telephone environments if users are to have access to LDAP directories or corporate WML Web sites the appropriate servers must be in place You must download the LDAP Directory Application software from the Avaya support Web site You must appropriately administer the telephones in accordance with Server Administration on page 51 Note Ensure that all required parameters are configured correctly For Avaya Media Server information see your administration documentation For the DHCP and file servers see Chapter 4 Server Administration 50 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Chapter 4 Server Administration Introduction When a 4600 Series IP Telephone is plugged in and powered it automatically negotiates with its associated LAN to determine the Ethernet speed From that point on the telephone s actions depend largely on network administration prior to telephone installation and on any actions the installer takes This chapter details the parameters and other data the telephone needs to operate and the alternatives to del
24. Bs ee ee ee Se ht Be a E 164 FONTS 2 4 4 a2 dre ee ad aa Ge oe eee bh Swe Se See SS Se amp 164 Maintaining Context a aoaaa 165 User Interaction ics 6a cb ed ROSCA HRT RV KES EO TK OOS 165 Click to Dial Functionality 2 2 2 ee eee ee et 166 Appendix C Creating Web Sites for Other 4600 Series IP Telephones 2 0 000 8 eee eee eee es 169 INPFODUCUON s sa S58 ee oA a a Sk Ge Se ee ee ee 169 Appendix D Administering Thin Client Directories 171 INFFODUCHON 4 64 oh Seat aid 46h ace a S Ske ee oe eS ee a ee ee eee 171 Appendix E The Push Feature 0 2 080082 eee 173 INPFOOUCUGIN re ia ee Bh SK es he SO ga BH OO Se 173 Push COMEM gobo ebb Soden CHESS HES owe ES be ed Se S 173 Push Prignvitl S 1 14408 8 bbe eR RRR ee 174 For More Information on Push 2 000 2 eee eee eee es 174 Appendix F Sample Upgrade Script File 0 06 175 INFFODUCNON 6 5 4 6 4b ae bea Se ee he RS She Gk es Ge i 175 et oa aaa a e a s a DEE AEE a ee ee a 245 Issue 7 October 2007 7 Contents 8 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Chapter 1 Introduction About This Guide This guide provides a description of Voice over IP and describes how to administer the DHCP TFTP and HTTP servers It also covers how to troubleshoot operational problems with the 4600 Series IP Telephones and the servers The 4600 Series IP Telephone product line supports two signaling pr
25. H HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH DISPLAY BACKLIGHT CONTROL HHHHHHHHHHHHH H Idle Time Before Turning Off Backlight minutes Number of minutes without phone activity to wait before turning off backlight A value of 0 means the backlight is never turned off This parameter is supported only by phones which have a backlight The default is 120 minutes SET BAKLIGHTOFF 120 H H FH HA 802 1X SETTINGS fA H This setting determines the 802 1 X operating mode 0 Unicast Supplicant operation only with PAE multicast pass through No proxy Logoff DEFAULT OPERATION 1 Same operation as for 0 but with proxy Logoff 2 Unicast or multicast Supplicant operation No PAE multicast pass through or proxy Logoff SET DOT1X 0 H FH EA ICMP SETTINGS 4 H Destination Unreachable Message Control Controls whether ICMP Destination Unreachable messages are generated 0 for No 1 for limited Port Unreachable messages 2 for Protocol and Port Unreachable messages SET ICMPDU 1 H Redirect Message control Controls whether received ICMP Redirect messages will 186 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction be processed OforNo 1 for Yes SET ICMPRED 0 H HHHHHHHHHHHHHAHHH BACKUP RESTORE SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHHHH H Backup and Restore URI URI used for HTTP backup and retrieval of user data Specify HTTP server and di
26. H HH H HH H H HH HH HH HH H H Introduction call is forwarded to the forward or coverage address The default delay is one ring cycle CALLFWDADDR sets the address to which calls are forwarded for the call forwarding feature The default is null Note the user can change or replace this administered value if CALLFWDSTAT is not 0 COVERAGEADDR sets the address to which calls will be forwarded for the call coverage feature The default is null Note the user can change or replace this administered value if CALLFWDSTAT is not 0 DATESEPARATOR sets the character to be used to delineate the date values The default is a backslash DATETIMEFORMAT sets the formatting of the date display The default is 0 which means the SIP phone will display 12 hour time and displays dates in mm dd yy format Setting DATETIMEFORMAT to 1 means the SIP phone will display 12 hour time and displays dates in dd mm yy format Setting DATETIMEFORMAT to 2 means the SIP phone will display 24 hour time and displays dates in mm dd yy format Setting DATETIMEFORMAT to 3 means the SIP phone will display 24 hour time and displays dates in dd mm yy format DIALPLAN sets the dial plan variable that the phone uses to automatically terminate a dial string The default is null See the 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Admin Guide for format and setting alternatives DIALWAIT sets the time in seconds the phone waits after the user ent
27. Issue 7 October 2007 239 Sample Upgrade Script File SET AUDIOSTHS 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE WML BROWSER SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH The WMLHOME setting is used to enable and administer the Web Application WMLIDLEURI may be used as an idle screen when the phone has been idle for WMLIDLETIME minutes By default this URL is NULL and this screen is not activated NOTES The WMLIDELURI idle screen is different than the Avaya screen saver activated by the SCREENSAVERON timer While it is possible to use WMLIDLEURI as an idle screen it is recommended that the SCREENSAVERON timer and the Avaya Screen Saver display be used for screen saver purposes Avaya hosts a web site for IP Phones The WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI parameters are set up to point your IP telephones to this hosted site To enable access to this site remove the from the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDLEURI lines To change the web site that your phones point to replace the provided URL in the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDELURI lines with the URL of your site SET WMLHOME http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 9600 home wml SET WMLIDLEURI http www mycompany com my_screen wml HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Emergency Contact Number H H If set this is the number dialed when the softkey labeled EMERGENCY is pressed The defa
28. SET PHY2PRIO 0 H FH A SNMP SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH H SNMP addresses If this parameter is set an SNMP query will only be accepted if the source IP Address of the query matches one of these values This parameter may contain one or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS name format separated by commas without any intervening spaces 0 to 255 ASCII characters including commas SET SNMPADD 192 168 0 22 192 168 0 23 H SNMP community name string This value must be set to enable viewing of the phone s MIB This value must match the community string name used in the SNMP query up to 32 ASCII characters no spaces SET SNMPSTRING mystring H H HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH EVENT LOGGING SETTINGS H HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH H Event Logging control Controls the level of events logged in the endptRecentLog and endptResetLog objects in the SNMP MIB Events with the selected severity level and higher will be logged LOGLOCAL is not supported on 96xx SIP phones 0 for disabled 1 for emergencies 2 for alerts 3 for critical 4 for errors 5 for warnings 6 for notices 7 for information Issue 7 October 2007 185 Sample Upgrade Script File 8 for debug SET LOGLOCAL 5 H Syslog Server address One syslog server IP Address in dotted decimal or DNS name format 0 to 255 ASCII characters SET LOGSRVR 192 168 0 15 H
29. SET TCP KEEP ALIVE STATUS 1 HH TCP Keep Alive Time Specifies number of seconds an idle phone will wait before sending out a TCP keep alive TCP ACK message 10 3600 SET TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_TIME 60 H TCP Keep Alive Interval Specifies number of seconds a phone will wait before re transmitting a TCP keep alive TCP ACK message 5 60 SET TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL 10 H HHHHHHHHHHHHHAHH EVENT LOGGING SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHHH H Local Event Logging control Controls the level of events recorded in the phone s local log Events with the selected severity level and higher will be logged 0 for emergencies 1 for alerts 2 for critical 3 for errors 4 for warnings 5 for notices 6 for information 7 for debug SET LOCAL_LOG_LEVEL 3 H Logging Categories Specifies categories to be logged in syslog and local log file This parameter must be specified to log events below Errors level Comma separated list of keywords See Administrator s guide for additional detail SET LOG_CATEGORY DHCP H HHHHHHHHHH HAHAH CERTIFICATE SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH H Certificate Server URI URI used to access SCEP server Introduction Issue 7 October 2007 211 Sample Upgrade Script File SET MYCERTURL http 192 168 0 25 certsrv mscep mscep dll H HTTP Proxy Specifies proxy server used to set up HTTP connecti
30. Sets the UDP port number for reception of broadcast CTI discovery messages 49714 49721 SET CTIUDPPORT 49721 HoH A HAHAHAHAHAHAHA HRHAHARHRRRHHHEHHH SIP SETTINGS Settings specific to telephones with SIP software HH ee a REGISTERWAIT sets the time in seconds between re registrations with the current server The default is 3600 60 minutes and valid values are 0 65536 for 46xx SIP telephones and 10 1000000000 for 96xx phones SIPDOMAIN sets the domain name to be used during registration The default is null but valid values are 0 to 255 ASCII characters with no spaces SIPPROXYSRVR sets the IP Address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN of the SIP Proxy server s The default is null but valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS format separated by commas without intervening spaces to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters For 96xx SIP models only one server address is supported SIPPORT sets the port that the telephone set will listen 198 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide HH HH HH HH HH HH H H HH H HH HH HH H HH H HH H Introduction for SIP signaling messages The default is 5060 but valid values are 1 to 5 ASCII digits from 0 to 65535 inclusive SPEAKERSTAT controls operation of Speakerphone as follows 0 no speakerphone allowed 1 one
31. htm1 gt 166 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Design Guidelines The generated code is rendered as this Web page Avaya 4630 Click to Dial Example Call IT Support Call Bill Pay 861 555 555 5151 1 555 555 5152 ft Home 4 Back Forward PJReload m Stop Phone Issue 7 October 2007 167 Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone 168 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Appendix C Creating Web Sites for Other 4600 Series IP Telephones Introduction A Web browser is available for Web application development in these 4600 Series IP H 323 Telephones e 4610SW e 4620 4620SW e 4621SW e 4622SW e 4625SW You can also develop Web applications for these SIP IP Telephones e 4610SW e 4620SW 4621SW See the 4600 Series IP Telephones Application Programmer Interface API Guide available on the Avaya support Web site http www avaya com support for detailed information about Web browser requirements characteristics and functionality That guide also provides suggestions to help design Web sites for viewing on applicable IP telephones Issue 7 October 2007 169 Creating Web Sites for Other 4600 Series IP Telephones 170 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Appendix D Administering Thin Client Directories Introduction If you have a corporate database that supports the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP Avaya s Thin Client Directory appl
32. s intranet WEBEXCEPT Null Optional Text string containing a list of one or more HTTP proxy server exception domains Separate each exception with commas and use up to a total of 127 ASCII characters This parameter is optional if all the Web pages the user accesses are on your organization s intranet If WEBPROXY is null the value of this parameter is ignored WEBPORT 80 Optional Text string containing the TCP port number for the HTTP proxy server The default is the TCP default for HTTP This parameter is optional if all the Web pages the user accesses are on your organization s intranet If WEBPROXY is null the value of this parameter is ignored 2 of 2 Note For assistance in developing local Web sites tailored to the 4630 IP Telephone s display see Appendix B Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Issue 7 October 2007 115 Server Administration 4630 4630SW Backup Restore 4630 4630SW users can create an FTP backup file for Soeed Dial button labels and unique option or parameter settings The associated Option is covered in Chapter 8 of the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone User Guide Data is saved in a file called 4630data txt on a user specified server and in a user specified directory Unlike the 4620 4620SW settings indicated in Table 12 the 4630 4630SW FTP settings cannot be centrally administered In addition to Speed Dial labels and associated telephone numbers a backup saves these op
33. separated by commas without intervening spaces with up to 255 total characters See Appendix E The Push Feature TPSLIST Null Optional List of Trusted Push Servers List of zero or more fully qualified domain path strings separated by commas without intervening spaces with up to 255 total characters See Appendix E The Push Feature WMLEXCEPT Null Optional Text string containing a list of one or more HTTP proxy server exception domains separated by commas up to a total of 127 ASCII characters This parameter is optional if the Web pages to be accessed by the user are all on your organization s intranet If WMLPROXY is null the value of this parameter is ignored WMLHOME Null Mandatory Text string containing the URL of the home page for the Web Access application WMLIDLETIME 10 Optional The number of minutes until the browser sends an HTTP GET command for the URI specified in WMLIDLEURI 1 to 3 ASCII numeric digits Valid values are 1 to 999 WMLIDLEURI Null Optional The URI of the Web page displayed when WMLIDLETIME is reached and the HTTP GET is successful WMLPORT 80 Optional Text string containing the TCP port number for the HTTP proxy server The default is the TCP default for HTTP This parameter is optional if the Web pages to be accessed by the user are all on your organization s intranet If WMLPROXY is null the value of this parameter is ignored WMLPROXY Null Optional Te
34. specific backup directory 4 Select Properties 5 In the Directory tab make sure the Write box is checked Additional step for IIS 6 0 Win2003 1 Use Internet Information Services Go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools 2 Below Default Web Site select Web Services Extension 3 Make sure the WebDAV option is set to Allowed 74 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide HTTP Configuration for Backup Restore For Apache Web Servers 1 Create a backup folder under the root directory of your Web server and make the folder writable by everyone All backup files will be stored in that directory If your backup folder is for instance C Program Files Apache Group Apache2 htdocs backup the 46xxsettings txt file should have a line similar to SET BRURI http www website com backup If your backup folder is the root directory the 46xxsettings txt file should have a line similar to SET BRURI http www website com 2 Edit your Web server configuration file httpd conf 3 Uncomment the two LoadModule lines associated with DAV LoadModule dav_module modules mod_dav so LoadModule dav_fs_module modules mod_dav_fs so Note If these modules are not available on your system typically the case on some Unix Linux Apache servers you have to recompile these two modules mod_dav amp mod_dav_fs into the server Other ways to load these modules might be available Check your
35. 0 65535 The default is 80 Applies only to 46xx H 323 phones and 96xx SIP phones SET HTTPPORT 80 Server Authentication Sets whether script files are downloaded from an authenticated server over an HTTPS link 0 for optional 1 for mandatory SET AUTH 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHAHH DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM DNS HHHHHHHHH If you set your DNS parameters via DHCP do not set them here as they will over ride your DHCP settings HH Your Domain Name Server SET DNSSRVR 198 152 15 15 Your DNS domain SET DOMAIN mycompany com HHHHHHHHHHHHH CALL SERVER ADDRESS OVERRIDE HHHHHH STATIC specifies whether a call server IP Address that has been manually programmed into the phone may override any value received via DHCP or this settings file O for disabled 2 for override STATIC is not supported on 96xx SIP phones SET STATIC 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHAHHH DHCP ADDRESS SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH DHCPSTD controls whether the phone continues to use an expired IP Address if the phone received no response to its address renewal request 0 for yes 1 for no SET DHCPSTD 0 VLANTEST specifies the number of seconds to wait for a DHCPOFFER when the phone is using a non zero VLAN ID 0 999 Issue 7 October 2007 177 Sample Upgrade Script File H SET VLANTEST 60 H HHHHHHHHHHHHH ENHANCED LOCAL DIALING RULES
36. 3 allow increasing levels of functionality and 1 allows the user complete application functionality Table 13 Application Status Flags and Their Meaning APPSTAT Value Meaning 0 Redial and Call Log are suppressed Speed Dial changes are not allowed 1 All administered applications are displayed with full functionality This is the default value 2 Call Log is suppressed Speed Dial changes are not allowed Only one number Redial is allowed 3 Speed Dial changes are not allowed In Table 13 suppressed applications are not displayed to the user Softkey labels application tabs etc that would usually be labeled or displayed to indicate the presence of that application are not labeled or displayed Options associated with suppressed applications can continue to display unless overridden by appropriate OPSTAT parameter administration However displayed options have no effect while the application is suppressed In Table 13 Speed Dial changes are not allowed means the Speed Dial application displays and the user can make calls as normal However any controls that allow the user to change any aspect of the Speed Dial application do not display This restriction includes the ability to add delete or edit any Speed Dial name or number In Table 13 Only one number Redial is allowed means the user Option that allows a choice between displaying one three or six of the last numbers dialed depending on the tele
37. 4 4612 R1 0 R1 0 is the only supported 4624 4600 IP Telephone vintage 4600 Series IP Telephones supporting SIP need Avaya Converged Communications Server CCS Release 3 0 which includes SIP Enablement Services SES to work properly Avaya Communication Manager is considered a feature server behind SES that provides Off PBX Station OPS features 48 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Hardware Requirements Additional Hardware Requirements e Ensure that the appropriate circuit pack s are administered on your media server See the media server s hardware guide for more detail A Important IP telephone firmware Release 2 3 or greater requires TN799C V3 or greater Control LAN C LAN circuit pack s For more information see the Communication Manager Software and Firmware Compatibility Matrix on the Avaya support Web site http www avaya com support e A Category 5e LAN If the telephones are to be powered from the LAN the power supply must be designed to the IEEE 802 3af 2003 standard for LAN powering e Electrical power provided to each telephone by one of the following two sources A Telephone Power Module also called the DC power jack You must order this module separately except for the 4630 and the 4690 phones The 4630 comes with its own power brick and the 4690 has its own power interface module The 4630SW does not come with a power brick For the 4630SW you must order the power brick
38. APPSTAT is set to 0 Call Log and Redial are suppressed and changes to Speed Dial Contacts are not allowed When APPSTAT is set to 1 Call Log Redial and Speed Dial Contacts work without restrictions When APPSTAT is set to 2 Call Log is suppressed For Redial the Last 6 numbers option is suppressed and changes to Speed Dial Contacts are not allowed When APPSTAT is set to 3 changes to Speed Dial Contacts are not allowed SET APPSTAT 1 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH OPTION ACCESS SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHH This setting restricts access to certain user options OPSTAT is not supported on 96xx SIP phones When OPSTAT is set to 000 the user options are not accessible When OPSTAT is set to 001 the user can only access the Log Off Option When OPSTAT is set to 010 the user can only access view only options The user cannot change any setting When OPSTAT is set to 011 the user can only access view only options and the Log Off Option HH When OPSTAT is set to 100 the user can access all options except the view only options and the Log Off option Issue 7 October 2007 179 Sample Upgrade Script File When OPSTAT is set to 101 the user can access all options except the view only options When OPSTAT is set to 110 the user can access all the options except the Log Off option HH When OP
39. Apache documentation at http httpd apache org docs for more details 4 Add the following lines in the httpd conf file WebDAV configuration DavLockDB C Program Files Apache Group Apache2 var DAVLock lt Location gt Dav On lt Location gt For Unix Linux Web servers the fourth line might look more like DavLockDB usr local apache2 var DAVLock Create the var directory and make it writable by everyone Right click Properties gt Security gt Add gt Everyone gt Full Control Issue 7 October 2007 75 Server Administration 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files A Important You can convert a 4602 4602SW 4602SW 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW and 4625SW IP Telephone from H 323 to SIP software or from SIP to H 323 software However depending on the telephone model and the software version you start from additional steps may be required from those mentioned in this section When converting from one protocol type to another on a given telephone please see Converting Software on Avaya 4600 Series IP Telephones in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide Document Number 555 233 128 The files necessary to operate the 4600 Series IP Telephones are available on the Avaya Web site at http www avaya com support Two files on the file server are essential Other files are needed when the Avaya IP Telephones need an upgrade The essential files are e Anupgrade script file which
40. Backup Restore automatically saves Speed Dial button labels and options parameter settings including local Feature button labels For the 4625SW IP Telephone backup also stores the background color of the Phone Speed Dial Call Log and Options applications As of R2 8 all phones that support backup restore of user specified data support use of either an FTP or HTTP client For FTP when the Automatic Backup option on a 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW or 4625SW IP Telephone is set to Yes and FTPSRVR is specified the FTPSTOR command attempts to save all Speed Dial contents all system options and non password parameters to the FTP server specified by FTPSRVR For HTTP when the Automatic Backup option on a 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621 SW 4622SW or 4625SW IP Telephone is set to Yes and HTTPSRVR is specified the HTTPPUT command attempts to save all Speed Dial contents all system options and non password parameters to the HTTP server specified by HTTPSRVR For both backup and restore the URI is constructed from the value of BRURI and the filename For H 323 telephones data is saved in a text file called ext_4610data txt or ext_4620data txt as appropriate to the telephone type where ext stands for the telephone extension For SIP telephones data is saved in a text file called ext_4610data_sip txt or ext_4620data_sip txt as appropriate to the telephone type The 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW all use 4620 as the telephone type for purpos
41. DHCP server is not mandatory but static addressing is necessary when a DHCP server is unavailable Because of difficulties associated with static addressing we very strongly recommend that a DHCP server be installed and that static addressing be avoided e The TFTP and or HTTP file server and application must be properly administered as described in TFTP H 323 Only on page 71 and HTTP on page 73 CAUTION A file server does not need to be available for the Avaya IP Telephones to operate The Avaya IP Telephones obtain important information from the script files on the file server and depend on the application file for software upgrades If the file server is not available when the Avaya IP Telephones reset the telephones will register with the media server and operate Some features may not be available and restoring those features requires resetting the Avaya IP Telephone s when the file server is available e For 4630 and 4630SW IP Telephone environments if users are to have access to LDAP directories or corporate Web sites the appropriate servers must be in place The 4630 4630SW Telephones must be appropriately administered in accordance with Server Administration on page 51 AX CAUTION 4630 IP Telephone Release 1 72 introduced significant software architecture changes Thus unlike most 4600 Series IP Telephones software releases 4630 IP Telephone Release 1 72 and later cannot be downgraded to a release earlier than 1 72
42. File SET ENABLE _MODIFY_CONTACTS 1 HH Multiple Contacts Warning Display Determines whether a warning message is displayed if there are multiple devices registered on a user s behalf Multiple registered devices may lead to service disruption OforNo 1 for Yes SET ENABLE _MULTIPLE_CONTACTS_WARNING 1 HE HHH HHH HHH PRESENCE SETTINGS 4HHHHHHHHHHHH Presence Enabled Determines whether presence functionality is enabled on the phone OforNo 1 for Yes SET ENABLE_PRESENCE 0 HHHHH HHH HHA HHA EXCHANGE SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHHHH Exchange Calendar Enabled Determines whether phone will retrieve calendar data from Microsoft Exchange OforNo 1 for Yes SET USE_EXCHANGE_CALENDAR 0 HH Exchange Calendar Display Determines whether menu item s for Exchange Calendar integration are displayed on the phone 0 for No 1 for Yes SET PROVIDE_EXCHANGE_CALENDAR 1 Exchange Domain Specifies domain information for URL used to obtain Exchange contacts and calendar data Appended to Exchange User ID specified in phone menus 0 to 255 ASCII characters SET EXCHANGE_USER_DOMAIN exchange mycompany com 206 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction Exchange Server List A list of one or more Exchange servers to be accessed for contacts and calendar data The default is null
43. IP Telephone MIB Downloading the Avaya 46xx IP Telephone MIB 2 065 Appendix B Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone 0 2 00 2 eee ee es INTMOQUEHON 2 61 264 60 4065 20d ee SHS oe ceeee te Ht ede seeds General Background 44 242046048658 844 SRR OE Browser Features and Behavior 2 220822 ee eee nuee Document Skeleton ccs ek See eRe ESTERS SE SSS ESE EESDS Content Based Style 21 644 ce eka ee ee Logical Style sic cc ee be de veces rent eee stewie eeaeds Physical Siyi 2cce och t adhe Gb S44 desde SS HES eS o s 6 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Contents Physical Spacing and Layout 2 2 2 e ee eee eee ees 157 Lists and TORIC S coso Ss hoata ae wis Gah es a me es eS 158 LIS 6 6 Pa a a we S 158 VapIeSs is ho a SE we a a eo a 158 WAGES 6 ob 66 eA ERG Se OS Oe OSES E MRE HES 159 LINKS 2 ones 2 meek one bone bee be See eed a Sls bee Ss 159 Pramosa OR RR a a es el 160 POMNS6 66 65 06 4 BE HS a PGS So a OR we a 160 Character Entel 22662 662k sks O26 hee eSR SS 2 PSH eS 161 GOPS S405 2 5 a 6 ee Soe Ste Sk 6 4 Se ok eS a i 162 POMS 66 6 Ae HRSA DDE DHS SEDER RTD ER REELED PD OHMS 162 COOKIES aa KOR Re ee ae a a we 162 Design Guidelines 224456654 466664 bia Se eeeeehucecacs 163 Fixed Width OB Ects 6 ccc ee PbS MS SPER RES ER DE DOT OSS 163 UNGUSS 465 2 ERK README ERED TEA REE RHODE ES ESS 163 FPMO gia ok a mee ee
44. If yours is a largely SIP environment when H 323 phones are installed the SIG system value should be set to 1 Detailed information about SIP is available in the SIP related documentation provided elsewhere on the Avaya support Web site Note As indicated above although the SIG system value is a Release 2 0 feature the 4601 IP Telephone supports SIG functionality even though the 4601 currently supports only Release 1 8 software Issue 7 October 2007 79 Server Administration Contents of the Upgrade Script See Appendix F Sample Upgrade Script File for a typical upgrade script file Contents of the Settings File Check the last lines of the Upgrade Script file example in the previous section They show that after checking the application software the 4600 Series IP Telephone looks for a 46xx settings file This optional file is under your control and is where you can identify non default option settings application specific parameters etc The Avaya support Web site has a template for this file for downloading An example of what the file could look like follows Note The following is intended only as an example Your settings will vary from the settings shown This sample assumes specification of a DNS Server parameters for the 4630 4630SW Directory application and a 4620 Web Browser See Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 for details about specific values You need only sp
45. Installation Guide describes the Local Administrative Option for QoS This option allows you to specify Diffserv values for Layer 3 audio DSCPAUD and signaling traffic DSCPSIG on a telephone by telephone basis The Avaya H 323 IP Telephones DiffServ values change to the values administered on the media server as soon as the telephone registers For more information see the document titled Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504kk Unless there is a specific need in your enterprise LAN we do not recommend you change the default values UDP Port Selection H 323 Only Some data networks include equipment that can perform UDP port selection This is a mechanism that gives packets with port numbers in a given range priority over packets with port numbers outside that range To support UDP port selection the 4600 Series IP Telephones can be administered from the Avaya Communication Manager Network Region form Locate specific implementation details for local administration of MCPORT in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide For Avaya Communication Manager administration find implementation details in Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager Software In summary the system value MCPORT represents the port on the TN2302AP circuit pack Use this port number to administer routers etc supporting UDP port selection to maximize priority of voice packets being exchanged between
46. Media Servers H 323 Only on page 55 and Related Documents on page 17 DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 See QoS Option Setting in Chapter 3 of the 4600 IP Telephone Installation Guide DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 See Secondary Ethernet Hub Interface Enable Disable in Chapter 3 of the 4600 IP Telephone Installation Guide 1 of 2 52 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction Table 2 Administration Alternatives and Options for 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Administrative Parameter s Mechanisms For More Information See SSON DHCP Customizing the Site Specific Option Number SSON on page 110 DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and especially DHCP on page 58 Settings file Customizing the Site Specific Option Number strongly recommended SSON on page 110 DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and especially TFTP Generic Setup on page 72 and HTTP Generic Setup on page 73 Manual administration at Site Specific Option Number Setting in Chapt
47. Number Specifies the telephone number to be dialed automatically when the telephone user presses the Messaging button The specified number is used to connect to the user s Voice Mail system Note This parameter setting is ignored for extensions configured as 96xx station types on the call server HE SET MSGNUM 1234 English Language Selection Status Specifies whether built in English language text strings are selectable by the user 0 for off 1 for on SET LANGOSTAT 1 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH AVAYA SCREEN SAVER SETTINGS 1 HHHHHAHHHHHHHH Idle time before the Avaya Screen Saver is activated minutes Number of minutes without phone activity to wait before the screen saver is activated A value of 0 means the screen saver is never activated The default is 240 minutes HH 196 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction Note This setting activates the Avaya Screen Saver which is different than the idle screen accessed by WMLIDLEURI While it is possible to use WMLIDLEURI as an idle screen it is recommended that the SCREENSAVERON timer and the Avaya Screen Saver display be used for screen saver purposes H SET SCREENSAVERON 240 H HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH A Avaya Menu Settings HHHHHHHHHHHHH H WML Application URI URI used for WML applications under A AVAYA Menu Specify HTTP server an
48. OF 1603 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH 216 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction PETER PETER EEE TEE ETE TEEPE TEE ETE EE A SETTINGS1608 PETER PETE TATE ETE TEE ET THEE EEE EE ATE A ETE TET These settings are used to set the local display language of your 1608 telephone HH First Language File Name Contains the name of the first language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG1FILE mlif_s1_v7_russian txt HH Second Language File Name Contains the name of the second language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG2FILE mif_s1_v7_spanish txt Third Language File Name Contains the name of the third language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSFILE mif_s1_v7_french_paris txt Fourth Language File Name Contains the name of the fourth language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG4FILE mlf_s1_v7_german txt System Wide Language Contains the name of the default system language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSYS mlf_s1_v7_german txt goto END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 1608 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH FREER EA AEH EE EE AE EE AE AEE A EE A eitis SETTINGS1616 FEAR EA AEE HE AEE EE AE EE AE EE A EE EE A A Issue 7 October
49. SET PROVIDE_OPTIONS_ SCREEN 1 Network Info Menu Display Determines whether Network Information menu is displayed on phone OforNo 1 for Yes SET PROVIDE_NETWORKINFO_SCREEN 1 Logout Enabled 204 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction Determines whether user can log out from phone OforNo 1 for Yes SET PROVIDE LOGOUT 1 HHHHHHHHHH HAHAH CALL LOG SETTINGS H HHHHHHHHHHHE Call Log Enabled Determines whether call logging and associated menus are available on the phone OforNo 1 for Yes SET ENABLE _CALL_LOG 1 HH Redial Enabled Determines whether redial softkey is available OforNo 1 for Yes SET ENABLE_REDIAL 1 Redial List Enabled Determines whether phone redials last number or displays list of recently dialed numbers 0 for last number redial 1 user can select between last number redial and redial list SET ENABLE_REDIAL LIST 1 HH FHA CONTACTS SETTINGS 4 HE HH Contacts Enabled Determines whether the contacts application and associated menus are available on the phone OforNo 1 for Yes SET ENABLE_CONTACTS 1 Contacts Modification Enabled Determines whether the list of contacts and the function of the contacts application can be modified on the phone OforNo 1 for Yes Issue 7 October 2007 205 Sample Upgrade Script
50. SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH Authentication Certificates List of trusted certificates to download to phone This parameter may contain one or more certificate filenames separated by commas without any intervening spaces Files may contain only PEM formatted certificates SET TRUSTCERTS avayaprca crt sip_product_root crt avayacallserver crt HH HHHHHHHHHH HHA HHH AUDIO SETTINGS HHHHHHAHHHHAHH Headset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the headset CAUTION Setting 2 turns OFF sidetone in H 323 release 1 1 and earlier setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 one level softer than NORMAL 2 two levels softer than NORMAL 3 three levels softer than NORMAL 4 OFF inaudible 5 one level louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHD 0 Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the handset CAUTION Setting 2 turns OFF sidetone in H 323 release 1 1 and earlier setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 one level softer than NORMAL 2 two levels softer than NORMAL 3 three levels softer than NORMAL H 4 OFF inaudible Issue 7 October 2007 233 Sample Upgrade Script File H 5 one level louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHS 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE WML BROWSER SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH The WMLHOME setting is used to enable and administer the
51. Telephones on Avaya Media Servers H 323 Only DHCP TFTP H 323 Only and HTTP CAUSE The telephone is seeking a gatekeeper on the media server using its administered gatekeeper list RESOLUTION Wait for a valid registration to occur or press to interrupt the search and re initialize manual or DHCP script files procedures CAUSE The telephone does not have sufficient room to store the downloaded file RESOLUTION Verify the proper filename is administered in the script file and that the proper application file is located in the appropriate location on the file server CAUSE DEFINITY Release 8 4 does not have an H 323 station extension for this telephone RESOLUTION On the station administration screen ensure the DCP set being aliased for this IP telephone has an H 323 station extension administered in accordance with switch administration instructions CAUSE Hardware failure prevented downloading of application file RESOLUTION Replace telephone 1 of 7 Issue 7 October 2007 141 Troubleshooting Guidelines Table 16 Possible Error Messages During Installation or Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Error Message Cause Resolution IP Address in use by another NAPT Error No Ethernet No file server or phone IP address No Socket System busy SwVSieeunl ieee CAUSE The telephone has detected an IP Address conflict RESOLUTION Verify administration
52. Text string can contain 0 to 32 ASCII characters Note SNMPSTRING cannot be set using Static Addressing ADDR As of R2 7 SNMPSTRING cannot be set on telephones programmed statically therefore SNMP cannot be used on those telephones For Release 2 8 and above CM 3 1 3 and above supports downloading of SNMPSTRING upon registration SNTPSRVR Null Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Server IP Addresses for SIP telephones Valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS name format separated by commas without any intervening spaces 0 to 255 ASCII characters including commas Null is a valid value but the value may not contain spaces SPEAKERSTAT 2 Hands Free Audio Operation for SIP IP telephones Valid value is one ASCII numeric digit 0 to 2 as follows 0 No hands free audio 1 One way Speaker monitor 2 Two way Speaker STATIC 0 Static programming override flag If set to O static programming never overrides file server DHCP or TFTP or call server administered data If set to 1 the file server TFTPSRVR HTTPSRVR TLSSRVR address is overridden with the statically programmed value If set to 2 the call server MCIPADD address is overridden with the statically programmed value the only non DHCP settable value If set to 3 both the file server and call server addresses are overridden by the statically programmed values STATIC can only be usefully set in DHCP and values 1
53. VLAN identifier to be used by IP telephones This parameter should only be set when IP telephones are to use a VLAN that is separate from the default data VLAN If the VLAN identifier is to be configured via H 323 signaling based on Avaya Communication Manager administration forms it should not be set here For H 323 phones this parameter may also be changed via LLDP SET L2QVLAN 0 Secondary Ethernet Interface VLAN Identifier VLAN Identifier to be used for frames to from the telephone s secondary Ethernet interface 0 4094 This parameter should only be set if VLANSEP is 1 For H 323 phones this parameter may also be changed via LLDP SET PHY2VLAN 0 Audio Priority Value Sets the layer 2 priority value for audio packets from the phone 0 7 For H 323 phones this parameter may also be changed from Communication Manager SET L2QAUD 6 Signaling Priority Value Sets the layer 2 priority value for signaling protocol messages from the phone 0 7 For H 323 phones this parameter may also be changed from Communication Manager 184 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction SET L2QSIG 6 H Secondary Ethernet Interface Priority Value Sets the priority value for layer 2 frames to from the telephone s secondary Ethernet interface 0 7 This parameter should only be set if VLANSEP is 1
54. a 1 4 VGA 320 pixels wide by 240 pixels high 256 colors supported display The data types and other features supported in the browser include HTML 4 01 Cascading Style Sheets CSS Levels 1 and 2 Document Object Model DOM Level 1 Images GIF and JPEG ECMAScript JavaScript 1 4 HTTP 1 0 and 1 1 Secure Sockets Layer SSL 2 0 and 3 0 Cookies stored in non volatile memory Click to Dial Functionality Browser Features and Behavior This section presents technologies implemented in the 4630 IP Telephone Web Access application along with any limitations or non standard implementations Style sheets are now the preferred mechanism to control Web page appearance and have made most attribute specifications with tags obsolete Therefore the majority of tag attributes were not tried The attributes that were tested were those of real interest to specific tags The browser is HTML 4 0 compliant with a few minor differences as noted where appropriate Note The sections in this appendix show comments specific to the 4630 IP Telephone and its browser in italics 154 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Browser Features and Behavior Document Skeleton Certain tags define the basic framework of an HTML document Most browsers are usually good at dealing with missing tags However when you apply style sheets it is essential that you follow the tag structures Even ignoring style sheets it is considered good style t
55. a reservation function nor does it guarantee any level of QoS RTCP supplements RTP by monitoring the quality of the RTP services and can provide real time information to users of an RTP service In a QoS context RTCP is valuable to identify information such as e packet loss e 1 way delay or how long a packet has to go from source A to destination B e jitter etc RTCP itself does not improve QoS but provides information to help identify where problem areas might be You cannot change the telephone s RSVP or RTCP parameters directly on the telephone or by TFTP or DHCP administration The only way to change these parameters is on the H 323 telephones and such a change requires appropriate switch administration See your Avaya Media Server administration documentation for more detail You cannot change these parameters on a SIP IP telephone Issue 7 October 2007 87 Server Administration Internal Audio Parameters The AUDIOENV variable provides control of some internal audio parameters in the 4600 Series IP Telephones Avaya does not recommend that customers set these values In certain situations particularly noisy environments Avaya SSE may recommend a change in the AUDIOENYV setting to reduce eliminate the effects environmental noise can have during phone use This variable applies to R2 4 and later software releases except R2 5 AUDIOENV is an index into a table that impacts four internal variables Table 6 Internal Audio V
56. administering SIP Session Initiation Protocol with Avaya Communication Manager Release 3 0 e Converged Communications Server Release 3 1 1 Installation and Administration 555 245 705 This document describes procedures for installing and administering the Converged Communication Server used by Session Initiation Protocol SIP IP Telephones 18 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Related Documents Avaya Extension to Cellular and Off PBX Station OPS Installation and Administration Guide 210 100 500 This document describes the installation administration maintenance and troubleshooting tasks necessary to install and set up Avaya Extension to Cellular and Off PBX Stations Avaya IP Telephone File Server Application Reference Guide 16 601433 This document describes how to install and implement the File Server Application for IP Telephones Avaya Application Solutions P Telephony Deployment Guide 555 245 600 This document describes the Avaya Application Solutions product line IP telephony product deployment and network requirements for integrating IP telephony products with an IP network Includes information on traffic engineering voice quality and quality of service reliability and recovery and network management 4600 Series IP Telephones Safety Instructions 555 233 779 This document contains important user safety instructions for the 4600 Series IP Telephones 30A Switched Hub Set Up Quic
57. available for a fee from the ITU Web site http www itu int Recommendation G711 Pulse Code Modulation PCM of Voice Frequencies November 1988 Recommendations G 726 40 32 24 16 kbit s Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM December 1990 G726 Appendix ll Digital test sequences for the verification of the G726 40 32 24 and 16 kbit s ADPCM March 1991 G726 Appendix III comparison of ADPCM algorithms May 1994 G726 Annex A Extensions of Recommendation G726 for use with uniform quantized input and output November 1994 G726 Annex B Packet format capability identifier and capability parameters for H 245 signaling July 2003 Recommendation G 729 Coding of speech at 8 kbit s using Conjugate Structure Algebraic Code Excited Linear Prediction CS ACELP March 1996 Annex A to Recommendation G729 Reduced complexity 8 kbit s CS ACELP speech codec November 1996 Annex B to Recommendation G729 A silence compression scheme for G 729 optimized for terminals conforming to Recommendation V 70 November 1996 Recommendation H 225 0 Call signalling protocols and media stream packetization for packet based multimedia communications systems February 1998 Recommendation H 245 Control protocol for multimedia communication February 1998 Recommendation H 323 Packet based multimedia communications systems February 1998 Issue 7 October 2007 23 Introduction ISO IEC ANSI IEEE Documents The following do
58. can be pushed Pushed audio messages can drive the telephone off hook if necessary and play the pushed message through the telephone s Speaker If the audio push has barge in priority the audio message is presented to the user even if the user is on a call In this latter case the far end is automatically placed on Hold and does not hear the pushed audio message A given push can include any or all of the three content forms but can have only one priority You can optionally accompany each push with notification tones to draw the user s attention to the telephone and to the pushed content Push Priorities Barge in pushes as the name implies are meant for information important to get to the user An example of a barge in push might be an audio message alerting users that the building is closing because of inclement weather You can accompany that message with a Web page detailing weather conditions There are very few circumstances that can prevent barge in pushes from being presented to the user Of course network conditions can prevent actual delivery of the pushed content Use normal pushes for less essential or less time critical information An example might be Mary has birthday cake in her office A normal push might or might not be presented to the user For example a normal audio push is not presented to a user already on a call Or a normal text message would not display until a higher priority message completes For M
59. firmware has been updated to support this feature It does not apply to the following endpoints third party H 323 SIP DCP BRI and analog Please refer to Administrator Guide for Avaya Communications Manager 03 300509 for further information Issue 7 October 2007 33 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols SIP Registration and Authentication A 4600 Series SIP IP Telephone requires an off PBX station OPS extension on the Avaya Communication Manager and a login and password on the Registration Server to register and authenticate it Registration is described in the Initialization process in Step 4 Telephone and the Call Server on page 36 For further information see the Converged Communication Server Release 3 0 Installation and Administration Guide 555 245 705 available on the Avaya support Web site http www avaya com support WAN Considerations QoS is harder on a WAN than a LAN A LAN assumes no bandwidth concerns A WAN assumes a finite amount of bandwidth Therefore QoS considerations are more significant when the IP telephony environment includes a WAN In addition there are administrative and hardware compatibility issues unique to WANs WAN administration is beyond the scope of this document Initialization Process These steps offer a high level description of the information exchanged when the telephone initializes and registers This description assumes that all equipment is proper
60. handset setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL 7 six levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL 9 two levels louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHS 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH WML BROWSER SETTINGS 44HHHHHHHHHHHHE The WMLHOME setting is used to enable and administer the Web Application HH The WMLIDLEURI setting acts as an idle screen when the phone has been idle see WMLIDLETIME value By default 222 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction this URL is NULL and this screen is not activated HH NOTE Avaya hosts a web site for IP Phones The WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI parameters are set up to point your IP telephones to this hosted site To enable access to this site remove the from the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDLEUR lines To change the web site that your phones point to replace the provided URL in the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDELURI lines with the URL of your site SET WMLHOME http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4620 home wml SET WMLIDLEURI http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4620 idle wml HH GOTO END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 4620 IP Phone Settings
61. i a SIP UDP IP Port 2048 3028 randomly selected o range may be changed via RTP Audio UDP IP Gatekeeper administration nae always an even number Port audio port 1 os UDPIIP only active during a call E gt if RTCP is enabled a RTCP UDP IP Port audio port 1 E gt only active during a call if RTCP is enabled Port audio port 2 EE RTCP UDP IP p lt SNMP UDP IP PERA CNA Registration TCP IP CNA Registration Kesponse TCP IP lt _ CNA Test Requests UDP IP EEA CNA Test Results UDP IP 38 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide H 323 Gatekeeper Fl Port 1719 p E Port 1720 SIP Registrar Proxy ai Port 5060 Media Gateway or another IP endpoint Port selected from the audio port range administered for the network region al Port audio port 1 RTCP Monitor Port as specified by Communication Manager Voice Monitoring Manager Port depends on Voice Monitoring Manager administration SNMP MIB Viewer Port depends on MIB viewer admin Avaya Converged Network Analyzer I Port CNAPORT Port any E Port any fll Port any Figure 2 Initialization and Address Resolution Diagram Initialization and Address Resolution 4600 Series IP Telephone Port 1024 5000 Operating System selected Port 1024 5000 Operating System selected Port 1024 5000
62. idle screen when the phone has been idle see WMLIDLETIME value By default this URL is NULL and this screen is not activated NOTE Avaya hosts a web site for IP Phones The WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI parameters are set up to point your IP telephones to this hosted site To enable access to this site remove the from the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDLEUR lines To change the web site that your phones point to replace the provided URL in the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDELURI lines with the URL of your site HH SET WMLHOME http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4620 home wml SET WMLIDLEURI http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4620 idle wml GOTO END 224 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction HHH END OF 4621 IP Phone Settings 4 HHH FREE EERE EAE EAE EAE AEE EEA EA A SETTINGS4622 FREER RE EAE EAE EE AE ERE EEA EA A A A H This section contains the phone model specific settings for the 4622 telephone H HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE AUDIO SETTINGS H HHHHHHAHHHHAHH H Headset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the headset H setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL 7 si
63. is properly administered and is compliant with IEEE 802 3af 2003 2 If you are using static addressing e use the VIEW command to find the names of the files being used and verify that these filenames match those on the file server Check on the Avaya Web site to verify whether the correct files are being used Note that the 4601 IP Telephone does not support static addressing and therefore does not support the VIEW command e use the ADDR option to verify IP Addresses e use the QoS option to verify QoS parameters See Chapter 3 of the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide 3 If the 4600 Series IP Telephone is not communicating with the DHCP TFTP HTTP or media server make a note of the last message displayed Consult the system administrator The Clear Administrative Option Sometimes you might want to remove all administered values user specified data and option settings etc Essentially you want to return a telephone to its initial clean slate condition Usually this is done to pass a telephone to a new dedicated user when the user s LOGOF F option is not sufficient For example if the new user has the same extension but has different permissions than the previous user The C LE A R option erases all administered data such as e static programming e file server and call server programming and e user settings including Speed Dial button labels and locally programmed Feature button labels 132 4600 Se
64. layer port number 0 65535 Applies only to H 323 telephones Text string containing the IP Addresses of one or more Avaya Converged Network Analyzer CNA servers in dotted decimal or DNS format Applies only to H 323 telephones Call Coverage Messages URI for SIP telephones The URI used for Call Coverage and Messages buttons Valid values are zero or one URI 0 to 255 ASCII characters Null is a valid value but the value may not contain spaces Computer Telephony Integration CTI Status 1 enabled O disabled Applies only to H 323 telephones CTI UDP listener port 49714 through 49721 inclusive Applies only to H 323 telephones Date Separation Character for SIP telephones Valid value is one ASCII graphic character from exclamation point hex 21 through tilde hex 7E Null is not a valid value The specified character is used to separate the month day and year on the telephone display Time Date Display Format for SIP telephones Valid value is one ASCII numeric digit 0 to 3 The values and associated Time and Date format the SIP telephones display are 0 12 hour time mm dd yy 1 12 hour time dd mm yy 2 24 hour time mm dd yy 3 24 hour time dd mm yy See Setting the Date and Time on SIP IP Telephones on page 112 for more information DHCP Standard flag If set to 1 the telephone strictly follows the DHCP standard with respect to giving up IP Addresses when the DHCP lease expires If set
65. multiple IP Addresses rather than being restricted to just one address for each element You can specify up to 127 total characters in each list of the following devices e router gateways e DHCP TFTP HTTP servers and e the media server Upon startup or a reboot the 4600 Telephone attempts to establish communication with these various network elements in turn The telephone starts with the first address on the respective list If the communication is denied or times out the telephone proceeds to the next address on the appropriate list and tries that one The telephone does not report failure unless all the addresses on a given list fail Obviously this capability significantly improves the reliability of IP telephony Multiple IP Addresses maximize the telephone s likelinood to communicate with backup equipment if the primary equipment is not operating or is not accessible For example alternate communication would be needed during a limited network outage However this capability also has the advantage of making station number portability easier Assume a situation where the company has multiple locations in London and New York all sharing a corporate IP network Users want to take their telephones from their offices in London and bring them to New York When users start up their telephones in the new location the local DHCP server will generally route them to the local call server In this case the call server for H 323 is the Avaya
66. oee ew e a 50 Reset Administrative Option 134 Restart the Telephone 136 RSVP and RTOP 04 87 S S8300 Media Server as TFTP Server J2 Script File Parameter Names and Corresponding Media Server Field Names 73 Scripts and Application Files for 4600 Series IP Telephones 2 1 eee ee es 76 SECUN ee seek ee ssh gom iy ee NES na de se ee te a 44 Settings File Contents of 80 SlGnaling Protocol Identifier procedure 79 Signaling Audio and Management 38 SIP and H 323 administering on same network 54 Site Specific Option Number customizing 110 SNMP and VolP aoaaa a 30 Software Alternatives for DHCP 58 Software Checklist oa a a a a ee 56 Software Requirements 50 Supplicant Operation 802 1X 93 System Parameter Values Impact of TLVs on 97 System Values Resetting 137 T Tandem Coding 0200 27 TCP UDP Port Utilization 2 40 36 Telephony Protocols 27 Terms Used in This Guide 13 WE Poe ete hi hie ee ne a E A 28 71 TRIP and VOP e aen a a a ee a 28 TFTP Generic Setup aooo a 72 TFTP Server on 88300 Media Server 2 72 TFTP Server Setup a aooaa aa 71 Thin Client Directories Administering the 171 Time and Date Setting on SIP IP Telephones 112 TLVs Impact on System Parameter Values
67. org getieee802 download 802 1AB 2005 pdf e For more information about 802 1X see http www standards ieee org getieee802 download 802 1 X 2004 pdf Customer Support Call the Avaya support number provided to you by your Avaya representative or Avaya reseller for 4600 Series IP Telephone support Information about Avaya products can be obtained at the following URL http www avaya com support 24 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Chapter 2 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols Introduction This chapter describes the differences between data and voice networks and the factors that influence the performance of VoIP The installation and administration of 4600 Series IP Telephones on Avaya Media Servers and the installation and configuration of DHCP and TFTP are addressed Overview of Voice over IP VoIP The 4600 Series IP Telephones allow enterprises to use Voice over IP VoIP VoIP uses packet switched networks over the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN instead of telephony However using data networks to transmit voice packets poses a problem Data networks were not designed for the specific qualities required by voice traffic Data and Voice Network Similarities Data and voice networks share similar functions because of the nature of networking e Signaling establishes a connection between two endpoints In a voice network signaling helps identify who the calling par
68. range of IP Addresses used by the IP telephones listed in Table 3 Required Network Information Before Installation Per DHCP Server The Start Address is the first IP Address to be used for the IP telephones The End Address is the last IP Address to be used for the IP telephones Set the Subnet Mask to the value recorded in Table 3 Required Network Information Before Installation Per DHCP Server To exclude any IP Addresses you do not want assigned to IP telephones within the Start and End Addresses range a In the Exclusion Range Start Address field enter the first IP Address in the range that you want to exclude b In the Exclusion Range End Address field enter the last IP Address in the range that you want to exclude c Click the Add button d Repeat steps a through c for each IP Address range to be excluded Example Suppose the range of IP Addresses available for your IP telephone network are e 135 254 76 7 to 135 254 76 80 e 135 254 76 90 to 135 254 76 200 e 135 254 76 225 to 135 254 76 230 Your start address and end address are 135 254 76 7 and 135 254 76 230 respectively Exclude the ranges 135 254 76 81 to 135 254 76 89 and 135 254 76 201 to 135 254 76 224 Note We recommend that you provision the 4600 Series IP Telephones with sequential IP Addresses We recommend not mixing 4600 Series IP Telephones and PCs in the same scope 64 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide 5 6
69. separately if LAN powering will not be used for that particular telephone model IEEE 802 3af 2003 if the LAN supports this powering scheme Note that the 4630 and 4690 cannot be powered this way but the 4630SW can be powered this way e Verify that the 4600 Series IP Telephone package includes the following components 1 telephone set 1 telephone handset Note that the 4622SW and the 4690 telephones do not come with handsets 1 H4DU 4 conductor coiled handset cord that is 9 feet long when extended plugged into the telephone and the handset The handset cord for the 4601 and 4601 is 6 feet long Not applicable for the 4622SW and 4690 IP Conference Telephones 1 Category 5 modular line cord for the connection from the IP telephone to the Ethernet wall jack 4600 Series IP Telephone Safety Instructions 555 233 779 Power Interface Module for the 4690 IP Conference Telephone only Power Brick for 4630 IP Telephones only Stylus for 4630 4630SW IP Telephones only e You might need a Category 5e modular line cord for the connection from the 4600 Series IP Telephone to the PC Note See the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide Issue 7 October 2007 49 Requirements Software Requirements The following software is required for 4600 Series IP Telephones to work properly e The DHCP server and application must be installed and properly administered as described in DHCP on page 58 AX CAUTION A
70. servers to support the 4600 Series SIP IP and IP Telephones and e Local Area Networks AX CAUTION Avaya does not support many of the products mentioned in this document Take care to ensure that there is adequate technical support available for these types of servers TFTP servers HTTP servers DHCP servers SIP Registration servers FTP servers LDAP servers and Web servers Note If the servers are not functioning correctly the 4600 Series IP Telephones may not operate correctly 10 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Document Organization The guide contains the following sections Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols Chapter 3 Requirements Chapter 4 Server Administration Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Guidelines Appendix A Avaya 46xx IP Telephone MIB Appendix B Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Appendix C Creating Web Sites for Other 4600 Series IP Telephones Appendix D Administering Thin Client Directories Appendix E The Push Feature Appendix F Sample Upgrade Script File Document Organization Provides an overview of the 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator document Describes VoIP and factors influencing its performance that must be considered when implementing this feature Describes the hardware and software requirements f
71. spaces MWISRVR Null Message Waiting Server IP Addresses for SIP telephones Valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS name format separated by commas without any intervening spaces 0 to 255 ASCII characters including commas Null is a valid value but the value may not contain spaces 7 of 12 104 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range OPSTAT 111 Options status flags Consists of 3 bits where each digit represents a 0 disabled off or 1 enabled on When OPSTAT is set to 000 all options are disabled and a user attempt to access the Options menu produces an error screen Setting the first character to 0 001 010 or 011 disables the second Options menu screen blocking user access to Personal Ringing Contrast Control Backup Restore Feature Button Labeling PC Ethernet interface and Select Display Language Setting the second character to 0 001 100 or 101 removes View IP Settings and Network Audio Quality from the main Options screen making these options unavailable to the user Further setting the second character to 0 also removes the IP Address from the Discovering message the telephone displays while attempting to find a media server Setting the third chara
72. telephone Telephone Only Authenticates When the IP telephone is configured for Supplicant Mode DOT 1X 2 the telephone can support authentication from the switch e Telephone with attached PC Telephone Only Authenticates When the IP telephone is configured for Supplicant Mode DOT1 X 2 the telephone can support authentication from the switch The attached PC in this scenario gains access to the network without being authenticated e Telephone with attached PC PC Only Authenticates When the IP telephone is configured for Pass Through Mode or Pass Through Mode with Logoff DOT1X 0 or 1 an attached PC running 802 1X supplicant software can be authenticated by the data switch The telephone in this scenario gains access to the network without being authenticated Some switches support authentication of multiple devices connected through a single switch port This is known as multi supplicant or MAC based operation These switches typically send unicast 802 1X packets to authenticating devices These switches support the following two scenarios e Standalone telephone Telephone Only Authenticates When the IP telephone is configured for Supplicant Mode DOT 1X 2 the telephone can support authentication from the switch e Telephone and PC Dual Authentication Both the IP telephone and the connected PC can support 802 1X authentication from the switch The IP telephone may be configured for Pass Through Mode or Pass Through Mod
73. the PBX and the telephone The default value for MCPORT is 1719 Administer the switch to use a port within the proper range for the specific LAN and the IP telephone s will copy that port A related parameter is PORTAUD which is the RTP port used by the switch If no UDP port range is administered on the switch the IP telephone uses an even numbered port randomly selected from the interval 4000 to 10000 Network Audio Quality Display on 4600 Series IP Telephones With the exceptions of the 4601 4601 4606 4612 4624 and 4690 IP Telephones all Series 4600 IP Telephones are by default administered to allow the end user an opportunity to monitor network audio performance while on a call The user guides for each telephone provide specific detail on getting to the appropriate screen what the end user sees and what the information means For 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621 SW 4622SW 4625SW 4630 4630SW IP Telephones these parameters display in real time to users on the appropriate screens while on a call Issue 7 October 2007 85 Server Administration Table 5 Parameters in Real Time Parameter Possible Values Audio Connection Yes if a receive RTP stream was established Present No if a receive RTP stream was not established Received Audio G711 G726A or G729 Coding Silence Suppression Yes if the telephone knows the far end has silence suppression Enabled No if the telephone knows the far end has silence suppression Disab
74. to 0 If the value is zero broadcasts are transmitted Can only be administered using DHCP TFTP not by a manual procedure e PHY2VLAN VLAN ID to be used for tagged data frames received on the secondary Ethernet interface when VLAN separation is enabled up to 4 digits from 0 to 4094 default is 0 Can only be administered using DHCP TFTP not by a manual procedure e PHY2PRIO Layer 2 data priority value to be used for tagged frames received on the secondary Ethernet interface when VLAN separation is enabled 1 digit 0 zero through 7 default is 0 Can only be administered using DHCP TFTP not by a manual procedure In the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide the Local Administrative Option ADDR also allows you to specify VLAN IDs and VLANTEST values The Local Administrative Option QoS allows you to specify values for L2Q L2QAUD and L2QSIG The 4600 Series IP Telephones can simultaneously support receipt of packets using or not using 802 1Q parameters For additional information on VLAN administration see VLAN Considerations on page 89 DIFFSERV IETF RFCs 2474 and 2475 define services basically as different ways to treat a network s different traffic subsets at the Internet Protocol IP layer Layer 3 For example some packets might be routed to expedite delivery and minimize delay with other packets routed to minimize loss or cost Redefining an octet in the Layer 3 headers for IP versions 4 or IPv
75. to add the DHCP scope for the IP telephones This is usually the name of your DHCP server machine Select Action gt New Scope from the menu Windows displays the New Scope Wizard to guide you through rest of the setup Click the Next button The Scope Name dialog box displays In the Name field enter a name for the scope such as DEFINITY IP Telephones then enter a brief comment in the Description field When you finish Steps 1 5 click the Next button The IP Address Range dialog box displays Define the range of IP Addresses used by the IP telephones listed in Table 3 Required Network Information Before Installation Per DHCP Server The Start IP Address is the first IP Address available to the IP telephones The End IP Address is the last IP Address available to the IP telephones Note We recommend not mixing 4600 Series IP Telephones and PCs in the same scope Define the subnet mask in one of two ways e The number of bits of an IP Address to use for the network subnet IDs e The subnet mask IP Address Enter only one of these values When you finish click the Next button The Add Exclusions dialog box displays Exclude any IP Addresses in the range specified in the previous step that you do not want assigned to an IP telephone a In the Start Address field under Exclusion Range enter the first IP Address in the range you want to exclude b In the End Address field under Exc
76. value and the priority value equal to the PHY2PRIO value Untagged frames received on the secondary Ethernet interface are not changed before forwarding The Ethernet switch forwarding logic determines that frames received on the Ethernet line interface are forwarded to the secondary Ethernet interface or to the telephone without regard to specific VLAN IDs or the existence of tags Tagged frames received on the Ethernet line interface will only be forwarded to the secondary Ethernet interface if the VLAN ID equals PHY2VLAN Tagged frames received on the Ethernet line interface will only be forwarded to the telephone if the VLAN ID equals the VLAN ID used by the telephone Untagged frames will continue to be forwarded or not forwarded as determined by the Ethernet switch forwarding logic Issue 7 October 2007 91 Server Administration Unnamed Registration As of Release 2 4 4600 Series IP Telephones support unnamed registration A telephone can register with the call server and receive limited service without requiring an extension and password entry Unless otherwise disabled using the system value UNNAMEDSTAT the telephone automatically attempts to register unnamed if no action is taken on the telephone Extension entry screen A telephone registered without the extension and password has the following characteristics e only one call appearance preventing conferences or call transfers e no administrable feature butto
77. was revised in June 2001 to support DEFINITY Release This version of the document was revised to support DEFINITY Release 10 and the 4630 IP Telephone This version of the document was revised in July 2002 to support Avaya Communication Manager Release 1 1 and the 4602 and 4620 IP Telephones This version of this document was revised in June 2003 to support Avaya Communication Manager Releases 1 2 and 1 3 This version also supported the 4602SW and 4630SW IP Telephones This version of this document was revised in December 2003 to add support for Avaya Communication Manager Release 2 0 This version also supported the 4610SW and 4620SW IP Telephones and the 4690 IP Conference Telephone This version of this document was revised in July 2004 to add support for Avaya Communication Manager Release 2 1 This version also added support for the TFTP server on the Avaya S8300 Media Server and support for the 4601 IP Telephone This version of this document was revised and issued in April 2005 This version supports through Avaya Communication Manager Release 2 2 This version also introduces the 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones This version of this document was revised and issued in August 2005 This version introduced the SIP IP Telephones This version also distinguishes between functionality that is H 323 specific and functionality that is SIP specific This version of this document was revised and issued in November 2005 to pr
78. your 9650 H 323 telephone HH First Language File Name Contains the name of the first language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt HH Note It is recommended you install the latest version of the language files in all 96xx H 323 telephones even if some Issue 7 October 2007 243 Sample Upgrade Script File phones are running an earlier release of software HH SET LANG1FILE mlf_s12_v10_russian txt Second Language File Name Contains the name of the second language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG2FILE mif_s12_v10_spanish txt HH Third Language File Name Contains the name of the third language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSFILE mlf_s12_v10_french_paris txt HH Fourth Language File Name Contains the name of the fourth language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG4FILE mif_s12_v10_german txt System Wide Language Contains the name of the default system language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSYS mlf_s12_v10_german txt Larger Text Font File name Specifies the loadable language file on the HTTP server for the Large Text Font 0 to 32 ASCII characters HE SET LANGLARGEFONT mlf_s12_v10_english_large txt GOTO END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 9650 IP Phone S
79. yyy PHY 2PRIO Z To enable VLAN separation also set related parameters in the 46xxsettings txt file as described in 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files on page 76 Note The total length of the DHCP packet cannot exceed 576 bytes List the TFTPDIR value before the TFTPSRVR value if the latter is specified in the SSON Some DHCP applications limit the length of Option 176 to 247 characters You can have SIP specific H 323 specific or common system parameters in the same SSON Option All such parameters are downloaded to all IP telephones but only the relevant parameters for a given telephone are acted upon The 4600 Series IP Telephones do not support Regular Expression Matching and therefore do not use wildcards See Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 In configurations where the upgrade script and application files are in the default directory do not use the TFTPDIR lt path gt You do not have to use Option 176 If you do not use this option you must ensure that the key information especially TFTPSRVR MCIPADD and MCPORT is administered appropriately elsewhere For example when you specify the DNS server in Option 6 and the Domain Name in Option 15 you can use the configured names AvayaTFTPServer and AvayaCallServer for TFTPSRVR and MCIPADD respectively Upgrading from IP telephone Releases prior to R1 60 requires Option 176 to be minimally administ
80. 0 IF MODEL4 SEQ 9620 GOTO SETTINGS9620 Introduction Issue 7 October 2007 215 Sample Upgrade Script File IF MODEL4 SEQ 9630 GOTO SETTINGS9630 IF MODEL4 SEQ 9640 GOTO SETTINGS9640 IF MODEL4 SEQ 9650 GOTO SETTINGS9650 GOTO END H FEE HEAL AEH EEE HE AE EE AE AE A eitis PETER PETE TATE ETE TEE ET TEE EEE AEE TET EE TEE SETTINGS1603 PETER PETE TEEE EEE TEE ETE TPE EEE EE APE A PETE EE a These settings are used to set the local display language of your 1603 telephone HH First Language File Name Contains the name of the first language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG1FILE mlif_s1_v7_russian txt Second Language File Name Contains the name of the second language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG2FILE mif_s1_v7_spanish txt Third Language File Name Contains the name of the third language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSFILE mif_s1_v7_french_paris txt Fourth Language File Name Contains the name of the fourth language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG4FILE mlf_s1_v7_german txt HH System Wide Language Contains the name of the default system language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSYS mlf_s1_v7_german txt HH goto END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END
81. 00 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction Certificate Renewal Threshold Specifies period of time after which to begin certificate renewal request Specified as percentage of certificate s Validity Object 1 99 SET MYCERTRENEW 90 HH Certificate Wait Behavior Specifies phone s behavior while performing certificate enrollment 0 for periodic background check 1 for wait until phone receives certificate denial or pending notification before continuing HH startup operation SET MYCERTWAIT 1 HH HHHHHHHHHH HHA HHH PORT SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH UDP Minimum Port Value Specifies the lower limit of the UDP port range to be used by RTP RTCP or SRTP SRTCP connections 1024 65503 SET RTP_PORT_LOW 5004 HH UDP Port Range Specifies the range or number of UDP ports available for RTP RTCP or SRTP SRTCP connections This value is added to RTP_PORT_LOW to determine the upper limit of the UDP port range 32 64511 SET RTP_PORT_RANGE 40 Signaling Port Minimum Value Specifies the minimum port value for SIP signaling 1024 65503 SET SIG_PORT_LOW 1024 Signaling Port Range Specifies the range or number of SIP signaling ports This value is added to SIG_PORT_LOW to determine the upper limit of the SIP signaling port range 32 64511 SET SIG_PORT_RANGE 64511 Issue 7 October
82. 1 Ofornone 1 for WEP 2 for WPA PSK 3 for WPA2 PSK 4 for WPA 802 1X 5 for WPA2 802 1X SET WTSECP1 0 Encryption type for Access Profile 1 Ofornone 1 for WEP 64 2 for WEP 128 3 for TKIP 4for AES SET ENCRYPTP1 0 Encryption key for Access Profile 1 0 to 63 ASCII characters no spaces SET WTKEYP1 northkey EAP type for Access Profile 1 Introduction Issue 7 October 2007 189 Sample Upgrade Script File 0 for disable 1for TLS 2for LEAP 3 for PEAP GTC 4 for PEAP MSCHAPV2 5 for TTLS CHAP 6 for TTLS MD5 7 for TTLS MSCHAP 8 for TTLS MSCHAPV2 SET EAPTYPEP1 0 FEE ACCESS PROFILE 2 SETTINGS 4 Name for Access Profile 2 0 to 31 ASCII characters no spaces SET WTPROF2 South SSID for Access Profile 2 0 to 31 ASCII characters no spaces SET WTSSIDP2 south mycompany HE WMM mode for Access Profile 2 O for off 1 foron SET WTWMMP2 0 Power save mode for Access Profile 2 O for off 1 foron SET WTPWRSAVP2 1 H Security mode for Access Profile 2 Ofornone 1 for WEP 2 for WPA PSK 3 for WPA2 PSK 4 for WPA 802 1X 5 for WPA2 802 1X SET WTSECP2 0 Encryption type for Access Profile 2 Ofornone 1 for WEP 64 190 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide 2 for WEP 1
83. 10 DAYS OF DELIVERY FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT Avaya grants End User a license within the scope of the license types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone Products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware Products originally sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User License Type s Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to be identified by type serial number feature key location or other specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Third party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the P
84. 192 168 0 9 HH HH HH HH PEPER PEAR EEE EE AETHER PETE AE BE TEE TA EE BE EE Ta HH HH 96xx SIP SETTINGS Settings applicable only to 96xx telephone models running the SIP protocol HH FREE EE EA AEE EEE HAE EE AEE A EE EE A A A eitis ai H Configuration Server Address of Avaya PPM server Set only if different 202 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide than SIPPROXYSRVR This parameter may contain one IP Address in dotted decimal or URI format optionally followed by colon and port number 0 to 255 ASCII characters SET CONFIG_SERVER example SIP Signaling Transport Type Specifies the type of transport to use for SIP signaling Ofor UDP 1 for TCP 2 for TLS default SET SIPSIGNAL 2 Early Media Enabled Specifies whether the phone sets up a voice channel to the called party before the call is answered Setting this parameter to 1 can speed up call setup OforNo 1 for Yes SET ENABLE EARLY MEDIA 1 HH Hold Indication Method Specifies method to use to indicate phone is on hold A setting of 1 is useful for compatibility with 3rd party SIP endpoints 0 for a directional attributes 1 for 0 0 0 0 IP Address SET USE_QUAD_ZEROES_ FOR_HOLD 0 H RTCP Enabled Enables the phone to send RTCP data during calls OforNo 1 for Yes SET RTCPCONT 1 HH Maximum Transmissi
85. 20 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW IP Telephone Stand Instructions 16 300299 This document provides information on how to mount a 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW IP or 4620SW 4621SW SIP IP Telephone on a wall 20 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Related Documents IETF Documents The following documents provide standards relevant to IP Telephony and are available for free from the IETF Web site htip www ietf org rfc html Requirements for Internet Hosts Communication Layers October 1989 by R Braden STD 3 RFC 1122 Requirements for Internet Hosts Application and Support October 1989 by R Braden STD 3 RFC 1123 Internet Protocol IP September 1981 by Information Sciences Institute STD 5 RFC 791 as amended by nternet Standard Subnetting Procedure August 1985 by J Mogul and J Postel STD 5 RFC 950 Broadcasting Internet Datagrams October 1984 by J Mogul STD 5 RFC 919 Broadcasting Internet Datagrams in the Presence of Subnets October 1984 by J Mogul STD 5 RFC 922 User Datagram Protocol UDP August 28 1980 by J Postel STD 6 RFC 768 Transmission Control Protocol TCP September 1981 by Information Sciences Institute STD 7 RFC 793 Domain Names Concepts and Facilities DNS November 1987 by P Mockapetris STD 13 RFC 1034 Domain Names Implementation and Specification DNS November 1987 by P Mockapetris STD 13 RFC 1035 The TFTP Protocol Revi
86. 2007 213 Sample Upgrade Script File Secure SIP port Destination TCP port used for secure SIP registration and signaling messages sent over TLS link For non Avaya environments only 1024 65535 SET SIP_PORT_SECURE 5061 H HHHHHHHHHH HAHAH TLS SETTINGS HHAHHHHH AHHH TLS Port Destination TCP port for https requests 0 65535 SET TLSPORT 443 HH TLS Directory Specifies path name that is pre pended to all file names used in HTTPS downloads SET TLSDIR example HH FREER AEAL AEE EEE AE EE AEE AE EE A A A A H HH SIP SOFTPHONE SETTINGS HH HH HH FEAR HEA AEE EAE EE HAE EE AEE A EE artiara eitiaieitini eitia ai HH WEBLMSRVR sets the IP Address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN of the Licensing Server Name or Address The default is null but valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS format separated by commas without intervening spaces to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters SP_DIRSRVR sets the IP Address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN of the LDAP Directory Server Name or Address The default is null but valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS format separated by commas without intervening spaces to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters SP_DIRSRVRPORT sets the TCP port number of your LDAP Directory Server The default port number is 38
87. 2007 217 Sample Upgrade Script File These settings are used to set the local display language of your 1616 telephone First Language File Name Contains the name of the first language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG1FILE mlif_s1_v7_russian txt HH Second Language File Name Contains the name of the second language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG2FILE mif_s1_v7_spanish txt HH Third Language File Name Contains the name of the third language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSFILE mif_s1_v7_french_paris txt HH Fourth Language File Name Contains the name of the fourth language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG4FILE mlf_s1_v7_german txt System Wide Language Contains the name of the default system language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSYS mlf_s1_v7_german txt HH goto END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 1616 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH PEPER PETE TERETE ETE ETE TE EEE PETE PTE TEA EA EE EEE BEE aE SETTINGS4601 ETRRE PEER TREE ETE ET TEETER ATE ETE TET This section contains the phone model specific settings for the 4601 telephone Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the handset 218 4600 Series IP Telephone LA
88. 28 3 for TKIP 4for AES SET ENCRYPTP2 0 HH Encryption key for Access Profile 2 0 to 63 ASCII characters no spaces SET WTKEYP2 southkey EAP type for Access Profile 2 0 for disable 1forTLS 2 for LEAP 3 for PEAP GTC 4 for PEAP MSCHAPV2 5 for TTLS CHAP 6 for TTLS MD5 7 for TTLS MSCHAP 8 for TTLS MSCHAPV2 SET EAPTYPEP2 0 HE Domain Name Server for Access Profile 2 SET DNSSRVRP2 198 152 20 15 H DNS domain for Access Profile 2 SET DOMAINP2 south mycompany com HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH ACCESS PROFILE 3 SETTINGS H HHHHH HH Name for Access Profile 3 0 to 31 ASCII characters no spaces SET WTPROF3 West SSID for Access Profile 3 0 to 31 ASCII characters no spaces SET WTSSIDP3 west mycompany WMM mode for Access Profile 3 0 for off 1 foron SET WTWMMP3 0 Power save mode for Access Profile 3 Introduction Issue 7 October 2007 191 Sample Upgrade Script File O for off 1 foron SET WTPWRSAVP3 1 Security mode for Access Profile 3 Ofornone 1 for WEP 2 for WPA PSK 3 for WPA2 PSK 4 for WPA 802 1X 5 for WPA2 802 1X SET WTSECP3 0 Encryption type for Access Profile 3 Ofornone 1 for WEP 64 2 for WEP 128 3 for TKIP 4for AES SET ENCRYPTP3 0 HE Encryption key for Access Profile 3 0 t
89. 30 release installing the stand alone file overwrites the original file Note The 4620 and the 4630 4630SW IP Telephones use the same 46xxsettings file Issue 7 October 2007 113 Server Administration In Table 11 parameters shown with a Mandatory status must be accurate and non null for the application to work The Avaya Help Web site however is always available Parameters with an Optional status may be changed to suit your environment If you do not change the parameters their defaults are used Table 11 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters by Application Parameter Name Default Value Status Description and Value Range Phone Application Parameters PHNEMERGNUM Null Optional Text string of a telephone number to be dialed in case of an emergency e g 911 Directory Application Parameters DIRSRVR Null Mandatory Text string of dotted decimal IP Address or DNS name of the server containing the LDAP directory DIRTOPDN Null Mandatory Directory Topmost Distinguished Name Text string of the LDAP directory s root entry Note that spaces and other special characters might need to be treated as specified in RFC 2253 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol v3 UTF 8 String Representation of Distinguished Names DIRFULLNAME cn Optional Text string for the database field s customer specific label DIRTELNUM telephoneNumber Optional Text string for the customer specific labe
90. 4 Some Error Conditions in Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Condition Cause Resolution The user indicates a 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621 SW 4622SW 4625SW specific or 4630 4630SW specific application is not accessible The user indicates AND the script file is on a 4610SW a TFTP server and the 4620SW 4621SW telephone is a SIP 4622SW telephone 4625SW specific or 4630 4630SW specific application is not accessible On hook dialing cannot be performed Speed Dial labels and administered feature buttons are not available and only one call appearance can be accessed PHY2STAT was set using the INT local procedure as specified in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide BUT the 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW uses the original setting instead of using the new setting following a reboot CAUSE The 46xxsettings script file is not pointed to accurately or is not properly administered to allow the application RESOLUTION Assuming the user is meant to have that application verify the 46xxsettings script file is properly specified for your system including case If your file server is UNIX or LINUX and extension Then verify all the relevant parameters indicated in Table 11 and Table 12 are accurately specified in the 46xxsettings file CAUSE SIP telephones only obtain script files application files and 46xxsettings files from HTTP servers RESOLUTION Move the rel
91. 4 and 6 or IPv6 provides the differentiation between these services Differentiated Services IPv4 calls this octet a Type of Service TOS octet while IPv6 calls this octet a Traffic Class In both cases the octet is interpreted differently than it was originally defined With Differentiated Services bits 0 through 5 of the octet identify a Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP The DSCP identifies a procedure to be used to handle that packet on a per hop basis Bits 6 and 7 of the octet are currently unused and DSCP compliant routers ignore them With DiffServ the default DSCP is all zeroes and represents no special handling RFC 2474 also defines eight Class Selector Codepoints which are the eight DSCP encodings that can be represented by xxx000 where x represents one bit These Code Selector Codepoints are considered prioritized with the larger numeric values having a higher relative order DSCP compliant routers should give the associated packets of larger valued DSCPs a probability of timely forwarding greater than a packet with a lower valued DSCP In addition to the eight Class Selector Codepoints a network can define its own DSCPs by defining 84 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide QoS encodings that do not terminate in 000 The specific treatment intended by these custom DSCPs will not necessarily be carried out by routers outside the customer s own network The 4600 Series IP Telephone
92. 40 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Error Messages Table 16 Possible Error Messages During Installation or Operation of 4600 Series IP Telepho nes Error Message Cause Resolution During Installation Bad Router Checksum error DiaiCi gt CONFLICT w EO Pao cream Discover aaa bbb ccc ddd File Cannot Discovering too large t save file Gateway Error Hardware failure CAUSE The telephone cannot find a router based on the information in the DHCP file for GIPADD RESOLUTION Change administration on DHCP as indicated in DHCP in Chapter 4 Server Administration CAUSE Downloaded application file was not downloaded or saved correctly RESOLUTION The telephone automatically resets and attempts to re initialize CAUSE At least one of the IP Address offered by the DHCP server conflicts with another address RESOLUTION Review DHCP server administration to identify duplicate IP Address es CAUSE The 46xx telephone is attempting to discover and register with the Gatekeeper at IP Address aaa bbb ccc ddd RESOLUTION If this message appears for more than a few seconds especially if the IP Address keeps changing the telephone is unable to contact the Gatekeeper Verify network connectivity between the telephone and the Gatekeeper or revise the Gatekeeper addresses in the DHCP script files to point to different Gatekeepers See Administering 4600 Series IP
93. 5 ed ge a ea a ae ee a 29 Network Assessment and VolP a1 Network Audio Quality Display on 4600 Series IP Telephones aoi 1 e a ee a i a 85 Network Information FREQUIRCG soe s a ace ena i ew a aw 56 Required Before Installation 57 Network Protocols n oaoa 25 Network Administering both H 323 and SIP Phones onthe same sos sm soana d a a E a 54 O Online Documentation osoo a 16 Options entering using the Telephone Dialpad 110 Options for 4600 Series IP Telephone Administration 52 P Pass Through and Proxy Logoff 802 1X 93 Port Utilization TCP UDP 36 Proxy Logoff and Pass Through 802 1X 93 Pushi COmMent ss cles ck a eh es i 173 Push Prionitis lt s a s sonos a moe e e i ee 174 Push More Information on 174 246 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Q QOS feet ety ew a es e a 29 82 DIFFSERV 23 3053 wk Ge ea es 84 IEEE 802 1D and 802 1Q 83 RSVPandRTCP 0 87 UDP Port Selection 2 85 QoS and VoIP 2 22 0048 29 QoS and 4600 Series IP Telephones 82 R Registration and Authentication forH 323 33 Registration and Authentication forSIP 34 Registration Unnamed 92 Related Documents 0204 ir Reliability and Performance 42 Requirements a aoa a a 47 FHardWare s e ee e aa a e Sa Pt A 47 SOWAS o s k o
94. 620SW 4630 4630SW would first require the user to edit the number generally by prepending digits to account for dial access codes country codes if applicable etc As of Release 1 8 the 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4630 4630SW can evaluate a raw telephone number This is also true of the 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW as of Release 2 2 Based on administered parameters the telephone can automatically prepend the correct digits saving the user time and effort This is the Enhanced Dialing feature The key to this feature s success is accurate administration of several important values Table 12 summarizes these values and their meanings That information is expanded upon in this section Note In all cases the values you administer are the values relevant to the Avaya Media Server s location at which the IP telephones are registered If a telephone is in Japan but its media server is in the United States set the PHNCC value to 1 for the United States In all cases the digits the phones insert and dial are subject to standard Avaya Media Server features and administration This includes Class of Service COS Class of Restriction COR Automatic Route Selection ARS etc As indicated in Table 10 you can administer the system parameter ENHDIALSTAT to turn off the Enhanced Local Dialing feature The system values relevant to the Enhanced Dialing Feature are e PHNCC the media server s international country code For example 1
95. 9 If you wish to change the port number you must set this value 214 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide H SP_DIRTOPDN sets the Directory Topmost Distinguished Name You must set this value to a non null value to enable the LDAP application The default is null but you should set DIRTOPDN to the LDAP root entry H SP_AC sets the Area Code H LOCAL_CALL_PREFIX sets the prefix for local calls Permissible values are the Area Code denoted by AC a string of digits or the default DIAL_AS_IS The example shows the Area Code H Examples SET WEBLMSRVR 192 168 0 11 SET SP_DIRSRVR lIdap east post avaya com SET SP_DIRSRVRPORT 389 SET SP_DIRTOPDN ou People o avaya com SET SP_AC 212 SET LOCAL_CALL_PREFIX AC H H FREE EE EAL AEH EEE HAE EE AEE A A EE A A H H PER MODEL SETTINGS Applies to specific telephone models H H FREE EE EAL AEE HE EEE HE HAE EE AEE A EE EE A A A eitis HH IF MODEL4 SEQ 1603 GOTO SETTINGS1603 IF MODEL4 SEQ 1608 GOTO SETTINGS1608 IF MODEL4 SEQ 1616 GOTO SETTINGS1616 IF MODEL4 SEQ 4601 GOTO SETTINGS4601 IF MODEL4 SEQ 4602 GOTO SETTINGS4602 IF MODEL4 SEQ 4610 GOTO SETTINGS4610 IF MODEL4 SEQ 4620 GOTO SETTINGS4620 IF MODEL4 SEQ 4621 GOTO SETTINGS4621 IF MODEL4 SEQ 4622 GOTO SETTINGS4622 IF MODEL4 SEQ 4625 GOTO SETTINGS4625 IF MODEL4 SEQ 4630 GOTO SETTINGS4630 IF MODEL4 SEQ 9610 GOTO SETTINGS961
96. AT values 124 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Guidelines Introduction This chapter describes problems that might occur during 4600 Series IP Telephone operation and possible ways of resolving these problems Error Conditions Table 14 Some Error Conditions in Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones identifies some of the possible operational problems that might be encountered after successful 4600 Series IP Telephone installation Possible installation problems and how to conduct a telephone self test are discussed in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide s Troubleshooting chapter The User Guides available on the Avaya support Web site also contain guidance for users having problems with specific IP telephone applications Note Most of the problems reported by 4600 Series IP Telephone users are not likely to be problems with the telephone itself Problems are more likely LAN based where Quality of Service server administration and other issues can impact end user perception of IP telephone performance Most error conditions are related to network problems and are common to both SIP and H 323 telephones Unless otherwise stated the error conditions and messages covered in this chapter apply equally to both telephone types H 323 and SIP Issue 7 October 2007 125 Troubleshooting Guidelines Table 14 Some Error Conditions in Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephone
97. AVAYA 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide 555 233 507 Issue 7 October 2007 2007 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Notice While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya Inc can assume no liability for any errors Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be incorporated in future releases For full legal page information please see the complete document Avaya Legal Page for Hardware Documentation Document number 03 600759 To locate this document on our Web site simply go to http www avaya com support and search for the document number in the search box Documentation disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya Customer and or End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya Avaya s agents servants and employees against all claims lawsuits demands and judgments arising out of or in connection with subsequent modifications additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by the Customer or End User Link disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this documentation and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the produc
98. Address by checking the contents of DHCP Option 6 See DHCP Generic Setup on page 59 for information At least one address in Option 6 must be a valid non zero dotted decimal address otherwise DNS fails The system parameter DOMAIN s Option 15 Table 10 text string is appended to the address es in Option 6 before the telephone attempts to resolve the DNS address If Option 6 contains a list of DNS addresses those addresses are queried in the order given if no response is received from previous addresses on the list As an alternative to administering DNS by DHCP you can specify the DNS server and or Domain name in the TFTP or HTTP script file But first SET the DNSSRVR and DOMAIN values so you can use those names later in the script Note If you administer Options 6 and 15 appropriately with DNS servers and Domain names respectively you do not need to specify MCIPADD and TFTPSRVR settings in the Site Specific Option string Customizing the Site Specific Option Number SSON DHCP Generic Setup on page 59 discusses that the SSON can be set to a string For each system parameter listed in Table 10 that you want to include append the SSON string with a comma followed by name value where name is a parameter name and value is its associated value Invalid values cause the data to be ignored for that name Customizing the SSON affects all telephones associated with that DHCP server Entering Options Using the Telephone Dial
99. Addresses for a gateway router TFTP server and Avaya Media Server Gatekeeper s We explain this specification in Overview of Voice over IP VoIP on page 25 Each list can contain up to 255 total ASCII characters with IP Addresses separated by commas with no intervening spaces Note that depending on the specific DHCP application only 127 characters might be supported 56 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Required Network Information When specifying IP Addresses for the file server or media server use either dotted decimal format xxx xxx xxx xxx or DNS names If you use DNS note that the system value DOMAIN is appended to the DNS names you specify If DOMAIN is null the DNS names must be fully qualified in accordance with IETF RFCs 1034 and 1035 For more specific information about DNS see DHCP Generic Setup on page 59 and DNS Addressing on page 110 Table 3 Required Network Information Before Installation Per DHCP Server 1 Gateway router IP Address es 2 TFTP server IP Address es H 323 only if applicable 3 Subnet mask 4 Avaya Media Server H 323 only Gatekeeper IP Address es 5 Avaya Media Server Gatekeep H 323 only Although this can be a value er port between 0 and 65535 the default value is 1719 Do not change the default value unless that value conflicts with an existing port assignment 6 TFTP server file path H 323 only if applicable 7 Telephone IP Address range From
100. Avaya Communication Manager 3 1 supports the 4601 and 4602SW IP Telephones Avaya Communications Manager 4 0 adds a Time to Service feature that decouples registration and TCP socket establishment for H 323 only Administration of a 4612 and 4624 IP Telephone is identical to a 6424 IP softphone The 4610SW and 4690 are not natively supported but can be aliased as 4620 IP Telephones See Related Documents on page 17 particularly the Administration for Network Connectivity and the Administrator Guides Follow these guidelines e On the Customer Options form verify that the IP Stations field is set to y Yes If it is not contact your Avaya sales representative e The IP Softphone field does not have to be set to y Yes DEFINITY Release 8 4 Note DEFINITY Release 8 4 is very old We do not recommend using this release DEFINITY Release 8 4 supports the 4612 and 4624 IP Telephones The 4612 and 4624 IP Telephones are aliased as 6424 Telephones administered as IP Softphones The administrative forms for the 6424 IP Softphone are used for the two IP telephones See Related Documents on page 17 particularly the Administration for Network Connectivity and the Administrator Guides Follow these guidelines e Alias the IP telephone as a 6424D DCP set with the IP Softphone field set to y Yes e Administer a Media Complex Ext for the audio channel Issue 7 October 2007 55 Server Administration DHCP an
101. B above default Applies to telephones with R 2 8 3 software only 0 to 9 where each step is in the range of 3 db Script file authentication value O HTTP is acceptable 1 HTTPS is required Number of minutes without activity to wait before turning off the display backlight Values 1 to 3 numeric ASCII numeric digits from 0 999 no spaces and no null value A value of 0 means the backlight never turns off 2 of 12 Issue 7 October 2007 99 Server Administration Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range BRURI Null CALLFWDSTAT 0 CNAPORT 50002 CNASRVR Null COVERAGEADDR Null CTISTAT 1 CTIUDPPORT 49721 DATESEPARATOR DATETIMEFORMAT 0 DHCPSTD 0 URI used for backup and restore of user data to HTTP file server 0 to 255 ASCII numeric digits zero or one URI Controls which Call Forwarding Feature Buttons are active and visible to the user for SIP telephones only Valid value is one ASCII numeric digit 0 to 7 Values are 0 No call forwarding 1 Call Forward 2 Call Forward Busy 3 Call Forward and Call Forward Busy 4 Call Forward No Answer 5 Call Forward and Call Forward No Answer 6 Call Forward Busy and Call Forward No Answer 7 Call Forward Call Forward Busy and Call Forward No Answer Avaya Converged Network Analyzer CNA server registration transport
102. DHCP option 12 Basic Optional System Capabilities Bit 2 Bridge will be set in the System Capabilities if the telephone has an internal Ethernet switch If Bit 2 is set in Enabled Capabilities then the secondary port is enabled Bit 5 Telephone will be set in the System Capabilities If Bit 5 is set in the Enabled Capabilities than the telephone is registered Basic Optional Management Address Mgmt IPv4 IP Address of telephone Interface number subtype 3 system port Interface number 1 OID SNMP MIB II sysObjectID of the telephone IEEE 802 3 MAC PHY Reports autonegotiation status and speed of Organization Configuration Status the uplink port on the telephone Specific TIA LLDP MED LLDP MED Media Endpoint Discovery Class III IP Capabilities Telephone TIA LLDP MED Network Policy Tagging Yes No VLAN ID for voice L2 Priority DSCP Value TIA LLDP MED Inventory Hardware MODEL Full Model Name Revision TIA LLDP MED Inventory Firmware BOOTNAME Revision 1 of 2 Issue 7 October 2007 95 Server Administration Table 8 LLDPDU Transmitted by the 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Category TLV Name Type TLV Info String Value TIA LLDP MED Inventory Software APPNAME Revision TIA LLDP MED Inventory Serial Telephone serial number Number TIA LLDP MED Inventory Avaya Manufacturer Name TIA LLDP MED Inventory Model MODEL4 4 character name Avaya Proprietary Ava
103. DIRLDAPPORT 389 The Directory Topmost Distinguished Name You must set this value to a non null value to enable the LDAP application The default is null but you should set DIRTOPDN to the LDAP root entry SET DIRTOPDN People The default LDAP search value The 4630 only supports searches on names The default is cn which stands for complete name in LDAP CHANGING THIS VALUE IS NOT RECOMMENDED unless your LDAP directory uses a different term for this data field SET DIRFULLNAME cn The Directory Telephone Number field The default is teleohonenumber CHANGING THIS VALUE IS NOT RECOMMENDED unless your LDAP directory uses a different term for this data field SET DIRTELNUM telephonenumber 228 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction HHHHHHHH Settings for 4630 IP Phone Web Application These settings are used to enable and administer the Web application on the 4630 NOTE Avaya hosts a web site for the 4630 IP Phone The WEBHOME and WEBCODING parameters are set up to point your 4630 IP telephones to this hosted site To enable this operation remove from the front of the lines SET WEBHOME and you may need to administer WEBPROXY as well To change the web site that your phones point to remove from the front of the lines SET WEBHOME and replace t
104. EAE BPTI PE HEE TT EE BEE ETE PEE a AVAYA IP TELEPHONE CONFIGURATION FILE TEMPLATE Oct 01 2007 Hi HH HH This file is to be used as a template for configuring Avaya IP telephones This file lists parameters supported through the following software releases 96xx telephone H 323 software release 1 5 46xx telephone H 323 software release 2 830 3631 telephone H 323 software release 1 2 0 16xx telephone H 323 software release 1 0 96xx telephone SIP software release 1 0 46xx telephone SIP software release 2 2 2 SIP Softphone release 2 1 Not all parameters are supported on all telephones or on all software releases See the appropriate issue of your telephone s Administrators Guide for more details The guides are available on support avaya com HH FREER TARE PEELE HERE TEPER PEE HE EET EE BEE PE TEE PAE ET a Use without quotes to comment out a line To activate a setting set the parameter to the appropriate value for your environment and remove the from the beginning of the line To include whitespaces in a value the entire value must be enclosed in double quotes example Issue 7 October 2007 175 Sample Upgrade Script File SET PARAM value1 value2 HH To set different set types to different values use the IF keyword statement See the LAN Adm
105. GROUP settings upon registration of the individual phone As of Release 2 0 the simplest way to separate groups of users is to associate each of them with a number You then edit the 46xxsettings file so each group is assigned the appropriate settings Use the GROUP system value for this purpose The GROUP system value cannot be set in the 46xxsettings file The GROUP System value can only be set ona telephone by telephone basis To do so first identify which phones are associated with which group and designate a number for each group The number can be any integer from 0 to 999 with 0 as the default meaning your largest group would be assigned as Group 0 Then at each non default telephone instruct the installer or end user to invoke the GROUP Local dialpad Administrative procedure as specified in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide and specify which GROUP number to use Once the GROUP assignments are in place edit the settings file to allow each telephone of the appropriate group to download its proper settings Here is an example of the settings file for the Call Center agent IF GROUP SEQ 1 goto CALLCENTER IF GROUP SEQ 2 goto HOTDESK specify settings unique to Group 0 goto END CALLCENTER specify settings unique to Group 1 goto END HOTDESK specify settings unique to Group 2 END specify settings common to all Groups Here is an example of the settings file for the SIP telephone users Note that
106. H HH H HH HH H HH HH For all 4620 sets and either 4610SW or 4620SW sets that have been loaded with single byte software the default use one of the following settings For English use keyword English For French use keyword Francais For Italian use keyword Italiano For Japanese use keyword Katakana For Dutch use keyword Nederlands For German use keyword Deutsch For Portuguese use keyword Portugues For Spanish use keyword Espanol For 4620SW 4625SW sets that have been loaded with multi byte software to support Chinese Russian Hebrew English fonts use one of the following settings For English use keyword English For Chinese use keyword Chinese For Russian use keyword Russian For Hebrew use keyword Hebrew Issue 7 October 2007 193 Sample Upgrade Script File For 4620SW 4625SW sets that have been loaded with multi byte software to support Japanese Russian Hebrew English fonts use one of the following settings For English use keyword English For Japanese use keyword Japanese For Russian use keyword Russian For Hebrew use keyword Hebrew For 4620SW 4625SW sets that have been loaded with multi byte software to support Korean Russian Hebrew English fonts use one of the following settings For English use keyword English For Korean use keyword Korean For Russian use keyword Russian For Hebrew use keyword Hebrew
107. HHHHHHHHE END OF 9620 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH Issue 7 October 2007 235 Sample Upgrade Script File PETER PETER ETE TEE ETE PPE EEE TEE A TET EEE SETTINGS9630 PETER EEE TATE ETE TEE TEE EEE ATE ETE TET This section contains the phone model specific settings for the 9630 telephone HHHHHHHHHH HAHAH CERTIFICATE SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH HH Authentication Certificates List of trusted certificates to download to phone This parameter may contain one or more certificate filenames separated by commas without any intervening spaces Files may contain only PEM formatted certificates SET TRUSTCERTS avayaprca crt sip_product_root crt avayacallserver crt HHHHHHHHHH HAHAH AUDIO SETTINGS HHHHHHHAHHHHAHH Headset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the headset HH CAUTION Setting 2 turns OFF sidetone in H 323 release 1 1 and earlier setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 one level softer than NORMAL 2 two levels softer than NORMAL 3 three levels softer than NORMAL 4 OFF inaudible 5 one level louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHD 0 Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the handset CAUTION Setting 2 turns OFF sidetone in H 323 release 1 1 and 236 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction earlier setting level
108. HTTP Configuration for Backup Restore a ssaa eee eee ees 74 F r ilS Web Servers e ce occi p ios oe SS Ge Be OS 74 For Apache Web Servers 2 0 eee ee es 75 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files 76 Choosing the Right Application File and Upgrade Script File 78 Contents of the Upgrade Script 2 00 ee eee eee es 80 Contents of the Settings File 2 2 2022 eee eee ee eee 80 The GROUP System Value 5 22ce 2 ee tebe eee eee eb ee eee 81 QOS 644 HOARD OE Oe DTRADR ED SSE T RAED CAE ORR ER we O R 82 IEEE 802 10 and 802 10 2 12 cs eee diac nee Sed da SOE 83 DIPPee Goo aes ee Sa oe Beek See 6 PES os he ees 84 UDP Port Selection H 323 Only 22 56 8288 686 8 se eee 2 85 Network Audio Quality Display on 4600 Series IP Telephones 85 RSVP and RTCP s ccc cS kb ed ee eee edd REELS ED ED Ee EES 87 Internal Audio Parameters 2 2 eee n 88 VLAN Considerations 2 26 eee AERA diia ka 89 VLAN TAGGING c e e eh eb eee eee OS OE ee wee 89 VLAN DGICCHON 2c co e848 9 eed GEES ERA SSSR SOE CEES EE 89 VLAN Separati ccs cc ba eee SKS REO ORE SS 90 Unnamed Registration bc cee ee EO 92 IEEE 5021X 2 428 24680040 S 6S SS Ss On HOSS OSHS SSeS ESS 92 802 1X Pass Through and Proxy Logoff 1 2 22 ee eee eee 93 802 1X Supplicant Operation saoasaoa 93 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 2 022085 eeeue 94 Issue 7 October 2007 5 Contents A
109. I characters depending on the system specific signaling protocol H 323 SIP etc currently being used Up to 16 ASCII characters name of the application code file big app currently stored in the telephone Ethernet connection From 2 to 7 ASCII characters either 100Mbps 10 Mbps or No Up to 16 ASCII characters Name of the boot code file little app currently stored in the telephone Up to 10 ASCII characters DSP code version Up to 10 ASCII characters DSP hardware version displayed only if a DSP hardware version identifier is available Build identifier Up to 10 ASCII characters DHCP standard flag If 1 the telephone strictly follows the DHCP standard by giving up IP Addresses when the DHCP lease expires If 0 the telephone uses the IP Address until it detects reset or a conflict Audio environment selection index 0 to 107 for pre 2 8 releases 0 to 191 for Release 2 8 and 0 299 beginning with Release 2 8 3 the system value See Audio Quality Tuning for IP Telephones Issue 2 for up to date description 2 of 3 Issue 7 October 2007 139 Troubleshooting Guidelines Table 15 Viewing Parameter Values continued Name System Value Format Handset sidetone Headset sidetone The AUDIOSTHS system value Applies to telephones with R2 4 and later software releases except R2 5 0 No change 1 6dB below nominal 2 no sidetone infinite loss
110. II In addition devices can define one or more custom MIBs that contain information about the device s specifics As of Release 1 1 the 4600 Series IP Telephones are fully compatible with SNMPv2c a later version of SNMP and with Structure of Management Information Version 2 SMlv2 The telephones respond correctly to queries from entities that comply with earlier versions of SNMP such as SNMPv1 Fully compatible means that the telephones respond to queries directed either at the MIB II or the Custom MIB The 4600 Series IP Telephone Custom MIB is read only Read only means that the values therein cannot be changed externally by means of network management tools You can restrict which IP Addresses the telephone accepts SNMP queries from You can also customize your community string with system values SNMPADD and SNMPSTRING respectively as indicated in Chapter 4 Server Administration Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters A Important SNMP has been enabled by default since Release 1 1 However as of Release 2 6 the SNMP default changed to Null Off To activate SNMP you must set SNMPSTRING to a non null value by means of either the 46xxsettings file or DHCP Option 176 SSON If you use static programming you cannot enable SNMP as of Release 2 6 As of Release 2 8 Communication Manager Release 3 1 3 and above supports downloading of SNMPADD and SNMPSTRING settings upon registration of t
111. Media Server and the call server for SIP is the Registration Server But the local call server denies service because it knows nothing about these new users With proper administration of the local DHCP server the telephone knows to try a second call server IP Address this one in London The user can then be automatically registered with the London call server Chapter 4 Server Administration contains details on administration of DHCP servers for lists of alternate media servers router gateways and TFTP servers For specific information see DNS Addressing on page 110 Issue 7 October 2007 43 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols Security In VoIP physical wire is replaced with an IP connection The connection is more mobile Unauthorized relocation of the IP telephone allows unauthorized users to send and receive calls as the valid owner For further details on toll fraud see the DEFINITY or Avaya Communication Manager documents mentioned in Related Documents on page 17 Any equipment on a data network including a 4600 Series IP Telephone can be the target of a Denial of Service attack Usually such an attack consists of flooding the network with so many messages that the equipment either e spends so much time processing the messages that legitimate tasks are not processed or e the equipment overloads and fails The 4600 Series IP Telephones cannot guarantee resistance to all Denial of Service attac
112. N Administrator Guide H setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL 7 six levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL 9 two levels louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHS 0 GOTO END HHH END OF 4601 IP Phone Settings HHHHHHHHHHHHH FREE AREER AEE EAE EAE AE EE EEA EA a SETTINGS4602 ERE AEREE AEE EAE EAE AE EE EEA EA EE A A H This section contains the phone model specific settings for the 4602 telephone H Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the handset H setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL H 7 six levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL 9 two levels louder than NORMAL Introduction Issue 7 October 2007 219 Sample Upgrade Script File SET AUDIOSTHS 0 HH H GOTO END HAHAHA END OF 4602 IP Phone Settings HHHHHHHHHHHHHH FREE EERE EAE EAE AEE EEA A A SETTINGS4610 ERE AE EEE AEE EAE EEA AEE EEA EA A H This section contains the phone model specific sett
113. NOTE Avaya hosts a web site for IP Phones The WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI parameters are set up to point your IP telephones to this hosted site To enable access to this site remove the from the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDLEUR lines To change the web site that your phones point to replace the provided URL in the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDELURI lines with the URL of your site SET WMLHOME http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4620 home wml SET WMLIDLEURI http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4620 idle wml GOTO END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 4610 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH FHHHHHHHHAHH HAHAHAHAHAHA A SETTINGS4620 TNE E T AT This section contains the phone model specific settings for the 4620 telephone HH Issue 7 October 2007 221 Sample Upgrade Script File HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH AUDIO SETTINGS H HHHHHHH HH HH He Headset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the headset setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL 7 six levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL 9 two levels louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHD 0 Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the
114. P server as you can on the TFTP server With proper administration the telephone seeks out and uses that material appropriately However not all 4600 Series IP Telephones support HTTP as indicated in Table 1 Table 1 File Servers and Compatible Telephone Software IP Telephone Software File Server IP Telephone Models Release Number HTTP HTTPS or TFTP 4601 4602SW 4625SW R2 7 4601 4602 4602SW 4610SW 4620 R2 2 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW HTTP HTTPS or TFTP 4690 R23 TFTP 4606 4612 4624 4625SW 4630 All releases 4630SW For Release 2 8 and future releases only use HTTPDIR and HTTPPORT to configure backup restore and file retrieval operations These must be set via DHCP for retrieving script files As with TFTP some functionality might be lost by a reset if the HTTP server is not available For more information see DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and HTTP on page 73 DNS The Domain Name System DNS is a distributed Internet directory service DNS is used mostly to translate between domain names and IP Addresses Release 1 5 and later Avaya IP Telephones can use DNS to resolve names into IP Addresses In DHCP TFTP and HTTP files DNS names can be used wherever IP Addresses were available as long as a valid DNS server is identified first See DNS Addressing on page 110 28 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Overview of Voice over IP VoIP NAT A Network Address Translation NAT is an ap
115. P servers e Download the upgrade script file and application file from the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support to the directory as specified by the file path e Table 10 Table 11 and Table 12 list the parameters you can administer when manually creating the TFTP script file Manual administration is discussed in 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files Note Many LINUX servers distinguish between uppercase and lowercase names Ensure that you accurately specify the 46xxsettings filename and the names and values of the data therein TFTP Server on S8300 Media Server The S8300 Media Server provides all the TFTP support required for the 4600 Series IP Telephones In addition the media server has an easy to use PC based interface for creating script files Thus you do not need to manually create the text files discussed in 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files The media server creates the files for you For more information about the media server see Downloading Avaya 46xx IP Telephone Software Using Avaya Media Servers mentioned in Related Documents Avaya File Server Application The Avaya IP Telephone File Server Application provides a Windows or Linux TFTP or HTTP Server you can install on your own server For more information see Avaya IP Telephone File Server Application Reference Guide Document 16 601433 mentioned in Related Documents and available fro
116. RFC 2205 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol March 1995 by M Wahl T Howes and S Kille RFC 1777 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol v3 December 1997 by M Wahl T Howes and S Kille RFC 2251 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol v3 Attribute Syntax Definitions December 1997 by M Wahl Coulbeck T Howes and S Kitte RFC 2252 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol v3 UTF 8 String Representation of Distinguished Names December 1997 by M Wahl S Kille and T Howes RFC 2253 The TLS Protocol Version 1 0 January 1999 by T Dierks and C Allen RFC 2246 SDP Session Description Protocol April 1998 by M Handley and V Jacobsen RFC 2327 RTP Payload for DTMF Digits Telephony Tones and Telephony Signals May 2000 by H Schulzrinne and S Petrack RFC 2833 SIP Session Initiation Protocol June 2002 by J Rosenberg et al RFC 3261 Session Initiation Protocol SIP Locating SIP Servers June 2002 by J Rosenberg and H Schulzrinne RFC 3263 Session Initiation Protocol SIP Specific Event Notification June 2002 by A B Roach RFC 3265 The Session Initiation Protocol SIP Refer Method April 2003 by R Sparks RFC 3515 A Message Summary and Message Waiting Indication Event Package for the Session Initiation Protocol SIP August 2004 by R Mahy RFC 3842 22 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Related Documents ITU Documents The following documents are
117. RVR 135 18 18 18 SET FTPDIR myftpdir HHHHHHHHHHHHHAHHHHHH LOGIN SETTINGS H HHAHHHHHHHHHHHHE QKLOGINSTAT specifies whether a password must always be entered manually at the login screen HH A value of 0 makes manual password entry mandatory A value of 1 enables a quick login by pressing the key to accept the current password value SET QKLOGINSTAT 1 HHHHHHHHHHHHHE 46xx PUSH INTERFACE SETTINGS HHHHHH These settings are used to administer the Push interface The TCP port number for the telephone s HTTP server 80 65535 The default is 80 SET PUSHPORT 80 Push capabilities settings PUSHCAP consists of 3 bits each 0 1 or 2 The rightmost bit controls the Top Line push mode The middle bit controls the Web Browser push mode The leftmost bit controls the Audio push mode Issue 7 October 2007 195 Sample Upgrade Script File When PUSHCAP is set to 000 all push modes are disabled When PUSHCAP is set to 111 barge in only is allowed in all push modes When PUSHCAP is set to 222 both barge in and normal pushes are allowed in all push modes SET PUSHCAP 111 FETERE PETE TREE AEE TREE AEE EEE EE BEE A BET EE EE BE a 96xx SETTINGS Settings applicable to 96xx telephone models HH HH PEPER PEER TREE EE ETE TEETER PETE BE TET EE EEE EEE BE Voice Mail Telephone
118. STAT is set to 111 the user can invoke any or all of the user options SET OPSTAT 111 HH HHHHHHHHHHHHH LOCAL PROCEDURE ACCESS SETTINGS H H HH Restrict Local Procedure Access Controls whether local dial pad procedures can be used to administer the telephone 0 means local procedures can be accessed from the telephone 1 means local procedures can not be accessed from the telephone CAUTION Be absolutely sure before setting PROCSTAT to 1 SET PROCSTAT 0 Local Procedure Password Sets password for local dial pad procedure access 1 to 7 ASCII numeric digits See your telephone s Administrator s guide for the default password supported by your release SET PROCPSWD 9999 HHHHHHHHHH HHA HHHAHH AUDIO SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHA HHA Automatic Gain Control AGC These settings enable or disable AGC A value of 1 enables AGC A value of 0 disables AGC AGCHAND controls handset AGC AGCHEAD controls headset AGC AGCSPKR controls speaker AGC SET AGCHAND 0 180 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction SET AGCHEAD 0 SET AGCSPKR 0 Headset Operational Mode Controls whether the headset ignores a disconnect message A value of 0 or 2 makes the headset go on hook when it receives a disconnect message A value of 1 or 3 makes the headset ignore a disconnec
119. Servers and more specifically HTTP Once you are familiar with that material you can administer telephone options as described in Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 Issue 7 October 2007 53 Server Administration Parameter Data Precedence If a given parameter is administered in multiple places the last server to provide the parameter has precedence The precedence from lowest to highest is e LLDP e manual administration with the two exceptions described for the system parameter STATIC on page 108 e DHCP e TFTP HTTP e the call server meaning the Avaya Media Server for H 323 and the Registration Server for SIP and finally e FTP HTTP backup files if administered and if permitted Settings the IP telephone receives from backup files or the media server overwrite any previous settings including manual settings The only exception to this sequence is in the case of VLAN IDs In the case of VLAN IDs LLDP settings of VLAN IDs are the absolute authority Then the usual sequence applies through TFTP or HTTP as appropriate If the VLAN ID is not zero any VLAN ID from the media server is ignored Administering H 323 and SIP IP Telephones on the Same Network Both H 323 and SIP based telephones can run on the same LAN or VLAN without difficulty You can even mix H 323 phones and SIP phones having the same model for example the 4620SW However any given telephone s
120. Web Application WMLIDLEURI may be used as an idle screen when the phone has been idle for WMLIDLETIME minutes By default this URL is NULL and this screen is not activated NOTES The WMLIDELURI idle screen is different than the Avaya screen saver activated by the SCREENSAVERON timer While it is possible to use WMLIDLEURI as an idle screen it is recommended that the SCREENSAVERON timer and the Avaya Screen Saver display be used for screen saver purposes Avaya hosts a web site for IP Phones The WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI parameters are set up to point your IP telephones to this hosted site To enable access to this site remove the from the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDLEURI lines To change the web site that your phones point to replace the provided URL in the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDELURI lines with the URL of your site SET WMLHOME http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 9600 home wml SET WMLIDLEURI http www mycompany com my_screen wml HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Emergency Contact Number H HH If set this is the number dialed when the softkey labeled EMERGENCY is pressed The default is null but any valid phone number is acceptable SET PHNEMERGNUM 911 234 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction HHHHHHH 9620 H 323 Phone Multi Language Administr
121. Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone images during setup also speeds up image downloading Finally reducing the size of the image reduces the amount of memory used Animated GIF images are a bad idea since they use up quite a bit of memory Additionally because of the persistence of the LCD screen animated images tend to smear in the browser and lose their effectiveness Therefore animated GIFs are considered not supported with this telephone Frames While contents and document text frames provide a useful method to browse a series of pages frames also use up real estate just like scrolloars Even if the frame decorations are all turned off a frame containing the majority of the document text suffers the problems discussed in Images the frame width is smaller increasing the chances of adding a horizontal scrollbar Additionally a single text line has fewer viewable characters and the page becomes even more difficult to read and comprehend Using simple top and bottom page or section navigation buttons can make up for the missing contents frame The interaction between frames and scrollbars is another important area of concern While most browsers manage scrolling within each frame independently the 4630 Web Access Application only scrolls the entire single window Scrolling by window moves the user s view of the frames as a whole but does not scroll any of the data in individual frames Data is likely to be in frames t
122. a button that the user can select This tag behaves much like the lt input type button gt tag except the physical appearance is three dimensional Also the button can display any text image or combination thereof e lt fieldset gt encapsulates a section of a form s contents to create a group of related form controls The telephone browser puts a simple box around the fieldset e lt label gt associates a relationship between a form control and one or more text labels Labels can be tied to form controls by the form attribute in the label and the id attribute in the form control They can also be tied by embedding the form control inside the lt label gt tag for example lt label gt Name lt input type text id name gt lt label gt e lt legend gt gives a label to a lt fieldset gt tag This label appears at the top of the fieldset section of the form with a line separating the legend from the rest of the fieldset e lt optgroup gt provides nested cascading menus to the user This does not seem to work e lt option gt defines the values available in a lt select gt scrolling list or drop down menu e lt select gt defines scrolling lists and drop down menus e lt textarea gt provides free form user input and display This provides a scrolled text area for the user to read or type text Character Entities As with any syntactic language HTML has certain characters that have special meaning The two most obvious chara
123. able 2 Administration Alternatives and Options for 4600 Series IP Telephones Parameter s Telephone Administration IP Addresses Tagging and VLAN Quality of Service Interface Administrative Mechanisms Avaya Call server applies only to H 323 DHCP strongly recommended Manual administration at the telephone LLDP DHCP Settings file strongly recommended Manual administration at the telephone Avaya Call server applies only to H 323 DHCP Settings file strongly recommended Manual administration at the telephone DHCP Settings file strongly recommended Manual administration at the telephone For More Information See Administering 4600 Series IP Telephones on Avaya Media Servers H 323 Only on page 55 and Related Documents on page 17 DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and especially DHCP on page 58 Static Addressing Installation in Chapter 3 of the 4600 IP Telephone Installation Guide See Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP on page 94 DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 Also see VLAN Considerations on page 89 for background information DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 Static Addressing Installation in Chapter 3 of the 4600 IP Telephone Installation Guide Administering 4600 Series IP Telephones on Avaya
124. al time information to users of an RTP service Real time Transport Protocol Provides end to end services for real time data such as voice over IP 2of3 14 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide SDP Signaling Channel Encryption SIP SMTP SNMP SNTP Supplicant TCP IP TFTP Time to Service TTS TLS TLV UDP Unnamed Registration VLAN VoIP WML Document Organization Session Description Protocol A well defined format for conveying sufficient information to discover and participate in a multimedia session Encryption of the signaling protocol exchanged between the IP telephone and the call server Signaling channel encryption provides additional security to the security provided by media channel encryption Session Initiation Protocol An IETF standard protocol for IP communication SIP enables IP telephony gateways client endpoints PBXs and other communication systems or devices to communicate with each other SIP mainly addresses the call setup and tear down mechanisms of sessions and is independent of the transmission of media streams between the caller and the called party SIP is an alternative to H 323 for VoIP signaling Simple Mail Transfer Protocol An IETF standard protocol RFC 2821 for e mail Part of the TCP IP protocol suite SMTP sets the message format and message transfer agent that stores and forwards the email Simple Network Management Protocol The Internet sta
125. all of the software bundles identified in this section If a majority are SIP based select the fourth software bundle identified as the SIP software bundle on the Web site The application files in this SIP software bundle are the same as in the default bundle The difference is a modified upgrade script file that assumes SIP is the default protocol for 4602 4602SW 4602SW 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW and 4625SW IP Telephones and that H 323 is the exception When you have a mixture of H 323 and SIP telephones use the SIG system value to ensure that each telephone type has appropriate software downloaded The SIG system value has three legal values e the default value 0 which indicates use the default protocol e 1 meaning use H 323 and e 2 meaning use SIP You decide the meaning of the default protocol If the majority of your IP telephones are H 323 based that should be the default Otherwise SIP is the default The SIG system value cannot be set in the 46xxsettings file or in the upgrade script file SIG can only be set on a telephone by telephone basis Instead of manually setting SIG yourself first instruct the installers of the non default phones to perform the SIGnaling Protocol Identifier procedure in Chapter 3 of the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide For example if yours is a largely H 323 environment when SIP phones are installed the SIG system value should be set to 2
126. an idle state 1 or 3 Call Center Operation where a disconnect message does not change the state of the telephone HTTPDIR Null Directory name prepended to all file names used in HTTP and HTTPS GET operations 0 to 127 ASCII characters For Release 2 8 and future releases only HTTPPORT 80 TCP port number used for HTTP file downloading from non Avaya servers 2 to 5 ASCII numeric digits from 80 to 65535 For Release 2 8 and future releases only HTTPSRVR IP Address es or DNS Name s of HTTP file server s used to download telephone files 6 of 12 Issue 7 October 2007 103 Server Administration Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range ICMPDU 1 Internet Control Message Protocol Destination Unreachable transmission Valid values are 0 Destination Unreachable DU messages are not transmitted 1 A Destination Unreachable DU message is not transmitted in response to received datagrams for which the designated transport protocol is not supported or in response to datagrams that designate closed TCP ports A DU message with a code of 3 Port Unreachable is transmitted only in response to datagrams designating closed UDP ports having port numbers greater than 32 767 and less than 35 000 4600 Series IP Telephones might limit the number of such messages transmitted per second Additional messages designating an uns
127. anada use keyword USA For France use keyword France For Germany use keyword Germany For Italy use keyword Italy For Ireland use keyword Ireland For Mexico use keyword Mexico For Spain use keyword Spain For United Kingdom use keyword UK For United States use keyword USA SET COUNTRY USA Date Format Specifies the format for dates displayed in the phone Use d for day of month Use m for month in decimal format Use y for year without century e g 07 Use Y for year with century e g 2007 Any character not preceded by is reproduced exactly SET DATEFORMAT m d y Time Format Specifies the format for time displayed in the phone 0 for am pm format 1 for 24h format SET TIMEFORMAT 0 Daylight Savings Time Mode Specifies daylight savings time setting for phone 0 for no daylight saving time 1 for daylight savings activated time set to DSTOFFSET 2 for automatic daylight savings adjustment as specified by DSTSTART and DSTSTOP SET DAYLIGHT_SAVING_SETTING_MODE 2 HH HHHHHHHHHH HAHAH TIMER PARAMETER SETTINGS HHHH Registration Retry Timer Issue 7 October 2007 209 Sample Upgrade Script File Specifies number of seconds to wait for a SIP registration response before re sending a registration request 1 60 NOTE For Avaya Distributed Office configurations
128. and 3 must be set via DHCP STATIC 1 allows local programming of individual telephones to use a different file server than the one commonly used by all telephones at the site This is useful to test a different set of 46xxsettings txt parameters or to force a telephone to use a different software load than is commonly used STATIC 2 allows individual telephones to be programmed to go to one particular call server STATIC 3 provides the combined features of STATIC 1 and STATIC 2 11 of 12 108 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range SYSLANG English Language of the 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW user interface in ASCII independent of the MultiVantage message language Options are English Deutsche Espanol Francais Italiano Nederlands Portugues and Katakana Japanese In addition to these languages the 4610SW 4620SW and 4625SW also support simplified Chinese Korean Russian and Hebrew The 4610SW and 4620SW also support Japanese Kanji TLSSRVR Null Text string containing the IP Addresses of one of more Avaya HTTPS servers in dotted decimal or DNS format UNNAMEDSTAT 1 Unnamed Registration Status Specifies whether unnamed registration is initiated if a user fails to enter a valu
129. aracters including Null PHY1STAT 1 Ethernet line interface setting 1 auto 2 10Mbps half duplex 3 10Mbps full duplex 4 100Mbps half duplex 5 100Mbps full duplex 8 of 12 Issue 7 October 2007 105 Server Administration Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range PHY2PRIO 0 Layer 2 priority value for frames received on or forwarded to the secondary Ethernet interface Set this parameter only when VLAN separation is enabled Values are from 0 7 PHY2VLAN 0 VLAN identifier used by frames received on or forwarded to the secondary Ethernet interface Set this parameter only when VLAN separation is enabled Value is 1 4 ASCII numeric digits from 0 to 4094 Null is not a valid value nor can the value contain spaces If this value is set by LLDP using the Port VLAN ID TLV value it will not change regardless of settings from other sources For more information see Parameter Data Precedence PHY2STAT 1 Secondary Ethernet interface setting O0 Secondary Ethernet interface off disabled 1 auto 2 10Mbps half duplex 3 10Mbps full duplex 4 100Mbps half duplex 5 100Mbps full duplex PROCPSWD Null Text string containing the local dialpad procedure password Null or 1 7 ASCII digits As of Release 2 8 Communication Manager Release 3 1 3 and above supports the downloading of the PROCPSWD setting upon registration o
130. ariables Variable Description Possible Values AGC_Dyn_Range AGC dynamic range 0 for a typical office environment 9dB 1 for 12dB 2 for 15dB and 3 for 18 AGC Dynamic range variation NR_thresh_Hd The noise reduction The noise reduction threshold for the headset threshold for the has a default value of 0 for a typical office headset environment 1 for call center applications 2 and 4 for increasingly noisy audio environments and 3 where noise reduction is disabled NR_thresh_Hs The noise reduction The noise reduction threshold for the handset threshold for the has a default value of 0 for a typical office handset environment 1 for call center applications 2 and 4 for increasingly noisy audio environments and 3 where noise reduction is disabled HD_Tx_Gain Headset transmit Headset transmit gain has a default value of gain 0 for normal transmit gain 1 for 6dB of gain and 2 for 6dB of gain AUDIOENV a range of 0 to 107 for pre 2 8 releases a range of 0 to 191 for Release 2 8 and a range of 0 to 299 beginning with Release 2 8 3 Set AUDIOENV 0 is the nominal setting 0 0 0 0 Please see Audio Quality Tuning for IP Telephones Issue 2 on support avaya com 88 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide VLAN Considerations VLAN Considerations This section contains information on how to administer 4600 Series IP Telephones to minimize registration time and maximize performance in a V
131. atakana etc e a multi byte version for 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones that support Chinese Russian and Hebrew e aseparate multi byte version for 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones that support Japanese Russian and Hebrew Note that the 4625SW does not currently support Japanese Kanji e aseparate multi byte version for 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones that support Korean Russian and Hebrew If multi byte support is not relevant to you select the default bundle even if you do not have any 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW telephones Otherwise select the software bundle that includes Chinese Japanese or Korean as appropriate 78 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files Note All bundles include the complete software for the other non 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW Telephones The software includes the 4620 IP Telephone but not the 4630 4630SW which remains separate The only differences between the four bundles are the software for the 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW and a slight change in the associated upgrade script file The 4602 4602SW 4602SW 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW and 4625SW IP Telephones can support either H 323 or SIP signaling protocols If a majority of your 4600 Series IP Telephones are H 323 based which is the most common situation you can use any or
132. ation These settings are used to set the local display language of your 9620 H 323 telephone First Language File Name Contains the name of the first language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt Note It is recommended you install the latest version of the language files in all 96xx H 323 telephones even if some phones are running an earlier release of software HH SET LANG1FILE mlf_s12_v10_russian txt Second Language File Name Contains the name of the second language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG2FILE mif_s12_v10_spanish txt Third Language File Name Contains the name of the third language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSFILE mlf_s12_v10_french_paris txt Fourth Language File Name Contains the name of the fourth language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG4FILE mif_s12_v10_german txt System Wide Language Contains the name of the default system language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSYS mlf_s12_v10_german txt Larger Text Font File name Specifies the loadable language file on the HTTP server for the Large Text Font 0 to 32 ASCII characters SET LANGLARGEFONT mlf_s12_v10_english_large txt GOTO END HHHHH
133. ayload type to be used for RFC 2833 signaling 96 127 SET DTMF_PAYLOAD_TYPE 120 DTMF Transmission Method Specifies whether DTMF tones are sent in band as regular audio or out of band using RFC 2833 procedures 1 for in band 2 for out of band using RFC 2833 SET SEND_DTMF_TYPE 2 HHH HH HHH HHHAHH COUNTRY SETTINGS HHHHHHAHHHH HHA HH System Wide Language Contains the name of the default system language file used in the phone The filename should be one of the files listed in the LANGUAGES parameter If no filename is specified or if the filename does not match one of the LANGUAGES values the phone shall use its built in English text strings 0 to 32 ASCII characters Filename must end in xml SET SYSTEM_LANGUAGE Mls_Spark_English xml Installed Languages Specifies the language files to be installed downloaded to the phone Filenames may be full URL relative pathname or filename 0 to 1096 ASCII characters including commas Filenames must end in xml SET LANGUAGES Mls _Spark_German xml Mls_Spark_ParisianFrench xml Mls_Spark_LatinAmericanSpanish xml 208 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction H Call Progress Tone Country Country used for network call progress tones For Argentina use keyword Argentina For Australia use keyword Australia For Brazil use keyword Brazil For C
134. cast pass through but without proxy Logoff 1 Unicast Supplicant operation only with PAE multicast pass through and proxy Logoff 2 Unicast or multicast Supplicant operation without PAE multicast pass through or proxy Logoff Daylight Savings Time Offset from Standard Time for SIP telephones Valid value is one ASCII numeric digit 0 to 2 The number of hours that clocks change between Standard Time and Daylight Savings Time 4 of 12 Issue 7 October 2007 101 Server Administration Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range DSTSTART TSunApr2L Daylight Savings Time Start Date for SIP telephones Valid values are six seven or nine ASCII characters with a format of either odddmmmht or Dmmmht where o is 1 character representing an ordinal adjective as follows 1 first 2 second 3 third 4 fourth or L last ddd is 3 characters containing the English abbreviation for the day of the week as follows Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri or Sat mmm is 3 characters containing the English abbreviation for the month as follows Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov or Dec h is 1 numeric digit representing the time at which to make the adjustment exactly on the hour at hAM 0h00 in military format where valid values of h are 0 through 9 tis 1 character representing the time zone relative to which to make th
135. caused an existing TCP connection to be lost the message indicates the telephone acknowledges the user intent and is attempting to re establish the TCP connection RESOLUTION The telephone will automatically attempt to re establish the TCP link for an administrable period 75 seconds is the default after which the telephone will attempt to register with the next gatekeeper on its list If the network outage continues appropriate analysis of the outage should be conducted Extension error CAUSE An invalid Avaya Media Server Registration extension has been entered RESOLUTION Reenter the extension if entered incorrectly If appropriate verify proper extension with respect to switch administration Extension in use CAUSE The specified extension is already in use according to the Avaya Media Server RESOLUTION You will be told if the telephone using the same extension is on a call or not Regardless you can proceed to take over the extension or to login using a different extension Telephones with large displays such as the 4610SW or 4625SW and Release 2 7 software provide detailed messages and specially labeled softkeys to guide you through either alternative If the telephone has a two line display or does not support Release 2 7 you can either press the key twice to take over the extension and log the other telephone off or you can press then to enter a different extension Failed to set phone IP CAUSE The 4600 Serie
136. ch and the telephone Verify no one changed the telephone settings locally using the VIEW and ADDR codes as described in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide Verify the telephone volume is set high enough Finally conduct a self test CAUSE Loss of communication with the PBX RESOLUTION As above but pay particular attention to the possibility that the telephone is being routed to a different DHCP server or even a different PBX switch If so the new server or switch might need to be administered to support the telephone CAUSE Loss of communication with the PBX RESOLUTION As above 2of6 Issue 7 October 2007 127 Troubleshooting Guidelines Table 14 Some Error Conditions in Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Condition Cause Resolution The telephone works but the audio quality is poor specifically the user hears echo when speaking on a handset the user hears echo on a headset but notona handset the user is on Speaker and hears no echo but the far end hears echo the user experiences sudden silences such as gaps in speech or static clipped or garbled speech etc The 4612 or 4624 IP Telephone works properly except the telephone does not ring Possible CAUSE Echo from digital to analog conversion on your Avaya Media Server trunk RESOLUTION Verify which trunk is causing the echo and swap the trunk s Trunk Termination parameter on the PBX Possib
137. characters Even the 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW cannot support all Han or Hiragana characters If you insert a character that the 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW4625SW does not support the display shows that character as a rectangle In addition to Speed Dial labels and associated telephone numbers the following options settings and non password parameters are saved during a backup Setting Parameter Name Type Personalized Ring Option Redial Option Phone Screen on Answer Option Phone Screen on Calling Option Call Timer Option Message Display Rate Option Call Appearance Width Option 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW only H 323 only Visual Alerting Option Call Log Enable Option Contrast Option Display Language Option Ethernet Option Automatic Backup Option FTP Server IP Address Parameter FTP Directory Path Parameter FTP User Name Parameter Phone Application Background Color Setting 4625SW only Speed Dial Application Background Color Setting 4625SW only Call Log Application Background Color Setting 4625SW only Options Application Background Color Setting 4625SW only YS we wes a Session Appearance Width Option SIP only Transfer Type Option SIP only Note When the Options Status Flag OPSTAT is set to 0 or 000 retrieving backed up data has no effect This prevents a user from bypassing the administration of OPSTAT and changing options settings in the backup file Table 12 includes OPST
138. ct specific requirements If AUDASYS is set to a non zero level visual alerting is controlled by the value of NVALERT If NVALERT 0 only audible alerting is generated if NVALERT 1 both visual and audible alerting is generated For setting NVALERT see 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide Document Number 555 233 128 Audio environment selection index 1 to 3 ASCII numeric digits from 0 to 107 for pre 2 8 Releases and 0 to 191 for Release 2 8 Applies only to telephones with R2 4 and later software releases except R2 5 For more information see Internal Audio Parameters on page 88 Also see Audio Quality Tuning for IP Telephones Issue 2 on support avaya com Headset sidetone setting Applies to telephones with R2 4 and later software releases except R2 5 0 No change 1 6dB below nominal 2 no sidetone infinite loss Applies to telephones with R 2 8 software only O No change 1 11dB below nominal 2 no sidetone infinite loss 3 20dB below nominal 4 30dB below nominal 1 12dB above default Applies to telephones with R 2 8 3 software only 0 to 9 where each step is in the range of 3 db Handset sidetone setting Applies to telephones with R2 4 and later software releases except R2 5 0 No change 1 6dB below nominal 2 no sidetone infinite loss Applies to telephones with R 2 8 software only O No change 1 11dB below nominal 2 no sidetone infinite loss 3 20dB below nominal 4 30dB below nominal 1 12d
139. ct the current calls audio quality It is assumed you have more detailed tools available for troubleshooting the LAN 86 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide QoS RSVP and RTCP Avaya IP Telephones implement the Resource ReSerVation Protocol RSVP to support WAN bandwidth management RSVP is administered from the media server Avaya IP Telephones implement the RTP Control Protocol RTCP so Avaya s Voice over IP VoIP Monitoring Manager VMON software can provide real time monitoring and historical data of audio quality for VoIP calls Resource ReSerVation Protocol RSVP is an IETF standard protocol hosts use to request resource reservations throughout a network RSVP compliant hosts send messages through a network to receivers Receivers respond with messages requesting a type of service and an amount of resources for example bandwidth to carry out that service The host is responsible for admitting approving or rejecting denying the request In a QoS context RSVP tries to reserve bandwidth on the network for voice calls on a call by call basis If insufficient bandwidth is available for the target voice quality a request to use network bandwidth for a voice call is rejected RTP Control Protocol RTCP as its name implies is a protocol that provides control functions for Real time Transport Protocol RTP RTP provides end to end network services for real time data such as Voice over IP But RTP does not provide
140. cter to 0 100 010 or 110 removes the Logoff option from the main Options menu making this feature unavailable to the user PHNCC 1 Telephone country code The administered international country code for the location of the serving MultiVantage server Range 1 3 digits from 1 to 999 PHNDPLENGTH 5 Telephone dial plan length The length of the administered dial plan for the serving MultiVantage server Range 1 or 2 digits from 3 to 10 PHNIC 011 Telephone international access code The digits dialed to access public network international trunks from the serving Multi Vantage server Range 1 4 digits PHNLD 1 Telephone long distance access code The digit dialed to access public network long distance trunks from the serving MultiVantage server Range 1 digit or Null PHNLDLENGTH 10 Length of national telephone number The number of digits in the longest possible national telephone number for the serving Avaya Media Server s location Range 1 or 2 digits from 5 to 15 PHNNUMOFSA 3 Number of Session Appearances for SIP telephones Valid values are a single ASCII numeric digit 1 to 5 The number of session appearances that will be supported on phones with larger displays The 4602 and 4602SW always have 2 session appearances PHNOL 9 Outside line access code The character s dialed to access public network local trunks from the serving Avaya Media Server Range 0 2 dialable ch
141. cters are the lt and gt symbols which surround all tags These characters cannot be typed in directly if the designer s intent is to display these characters Thus all characters that a Web browser can display are assigned numeric values In addition many of these characters also are assigned names The numeric values are entered into the source Web page as amp nnn where nnn is some 3 digit value For example the lt symbol is entered as amp 060 Name values are entered into the source Web page as amp name where name is the name associated with this character Again using the lt symbol this would be entered as amp lt The browser fully supports the set of characters defined by the World Wide Web Consortium in conformance with the standard Issue 7 October 2007 161 Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Colors The browser supports 256 colors Colors can be specified by name RGB percentages or RGB raw numbers The HTML and CSS specifications suggest 16 named colors The 4630 IP Telephone Web Browser recognizes these color names which are e aqua e gray e navy e teal e black e green e purple e olive e blue e lime e red e white e fuchsia e maroon e silver e yellow Beyond these 16 well known names we recommend using RGB percentages or raw numbers to specify colors Fonts Font specifications are one of the most important styles you can apply to a Web browser Because of the 4630 IP Telepho
142. ctive if e The telephone is not statically programmed e The telephone is not registered with the Call Server e Name begins with VOICE case does not matter e The VLAN is not zero If VLAN Name causes the telephone to change VLAN and the telephone already has an IP Address the telephone will release the IP Address and send out a new DHCPDISCOVER on the new VLAN ID MCIPADD will be set to this value if it has not already been set TLSSRVR HTTPSRVR and TFTPSRVR will be set to this value if none of them have already been set The default L2Q is set to the value of this TLV No change is made to the current L2 tagging but the new default value is used on the next reboot This proprietary TLV can initiate a power conservation mode The telephones that support this will turn on off the telephone backlight and the backlight of an attached EU24BL Button Module in response to this TLV These telephones e do not support LLDP on the secondary Ethernet interface e will not forward frames received with the 802 1AB LLDP group multicast address as the destination MAC address between the Ethernet line interface and the secondary Ethernet interface Issue 7 October 2007 97 Server Administration Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones This chapter s Introduction indicates that there are many parameters you can administer for the 4600 Series IP Telephones This section explains how to change parameters by
143. cuments are available free from the ISO IEC standards Web site http www standards ieee org getieee802 portfolio html e International Standard ISO IEC 8802 2 1998 ANSI IEEE Std 802 2 1998 Edition Information technology Telecommunications and information exchange between systems Local and metropolitan area networks Specific requirements Part 2 Logical Link Control e ISO IEC 15802 3 1998 ANSI IEEE Std 802 1D 1998 Edition Information technology Telecommunications and information exchange between systems Local and metropolitan area networks Common specifications Part 3 Media Access Control MAC Bridges e EEE Std 802 1Q 1998 IEEE Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks e IEEE Std 802 3af 2003 IEEE Standard for Information technology Telecommunications and information exchange between systems Local and metropolitan area networks Specific requirements Part 3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Amendment Data Terminal Equipment DTE Power via Media Dependent Interface MDI e EEE Std 802 1X 2004 IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Port Based Network Access Control e IEEE Std 802 1AB 2005 IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery e For more information about 802 1AB see http www standards ieee
144. d 8000 for WEBHOME 4630 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW proxy servers but URLs VMLHOME 4630 or and 4630 only may specify other ports WMLHOME 4620 is as well non null TEA bd HTTP over SSL TCP IP gt Port 443 4630 only Port 21 FTP Server only active if user enters FTP control TCP IP FTP server IP Address Port 21 La 4610SW 4620 4620SW m 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW Port 20 and 4630 only only active during a backup or restore i lt q FTP data TCP IP gt Port 20 4610SW 4620 4620SW Port 49714 49721 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW 49721 unless changed and 4630 only via CTIUDPPORT IP Softphone only active if CTI Discovery UDP IP Port E ge ort 50000 51000 shone ist STAT T TUS not supported by the Ml OS seece and signaling channel i os encryption is not being used lt Port 49722 pum aq CT Data TCP IP am Port 1024 5000 only active if CTISTAT is 1 CTI is not supported by the randomly selected phone is fully registered 4601 4601 or 4602 and signaling channel encryption is not being used 40 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Applications continued 4600 Series IP Telephone IP Telephone Port 5000 mtg VOBEXIUDPAP ply Port 5000 only active if IR Object Relay is only IRSTAT is 1 supported by the 4620 and 4620SW aoe ee sie gt Mail Server perating System SMTP TCP IP selected only active if l Po
145. d File Servers Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP provides a means by which configuration parameters can be automatically assigned to clients on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes a 4600 Series IP Telephone network s maintenance by removing the need to individually assign and maintain IP Addresses and other parameters for each IP telephone on the network Software Checklist Ensure that you have purchased and or own licenses to install and use any or all of the DHCP TFTP and HTTP server software Note It is possible to install the DHCP TFTP and HTTP server software on the same machine CAUTION The circuitry in the 4600 Series IP Telephones reserves IP Addresses of the form 192 168 2 x for internal communications The telephone s will not properly use addresses you specify if they are of that form Required Network Information DHCP is the control point where an enterprise controls its IP telephones Before administering DHCP and TFTP HTTP and TLS as applicable complete the information in Table 3 Required Network Information Before Installation Per DHCP Server on page 57 Completing the pre installation steps ensures that you have the necessary information regarding your network If you have more than one Gateway TFTP HTTP TLS server subnet mask and Gatekeeper in your configuration you need to complete Table 3 for each DHCP server Release 1 5 of the 4600 Series Telephones supported specifying a list of IP
146. d an upgrade script file are bundled together in that self extracting executable file The self extracting executable file comes in both zipped and unzipped format See Choosing the Right Application File and Upgrade Script File on page 78 for more information 76 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files The Avaya provided upgrade script files and the binaries included in the zip files upgrade the Avaya IP Telephones You should not need to modify them It is essential that all the binary files be together on the file server When downloading a new release onto a file server with an existing release already on it we recommend that you Stop the file server Back up all the current file server directories as applicable Copy your 46xxsettings txt file to a backup location Remove all the files in the download directory This ensures that you do not have an inappropriate binary or configuration file on the server Download the self extracting executable file or the corresponding zip file Extract all the files When extracting the 4630 files ensure that you allow the directories to be created Copy your 46xxsettings txt file back into the download directory Check the Readme files for release specific information Modify the 46xxsettings txt file as desired Restart the TFTP HTTP Server Reset your Avaya IP Telephones You can download a default upgrade script fi
147. d directory path to administration file AvayaMenuAdmin txt Do not specify the administration file name SET AMADMIN hittp 192 168 0 28 PETER PEER TERETE ETE ETE PEEP PTE AE BE TE TA EE TEE EE HH H 323 SETTINGS Settings specific to telephones with H 323 software PETER PETE TEEEE EE TEE ETE TEETER AEE ETE EEE A The Call Server Addresses If you set your Call Server Addresses via DHCP do not set them here as they will over ride your DHCP settings One or more Avaya Communication Manager server IP addresses in dotted decimal or DNS name format separated by commas without any intervening spaces 0 to 255 ASCII characters including commas SET MCIPADD 192 168 0 5 Unnamed Registration Status Specifies whether unnamed registration is initiated if a user fails to enter a value at the Extension prompt Unnamed registration provides the telephone with TTl level service enabling a user for example to dial emergency services such as 911 SET UNNAMEDSTAT 1 Issue 7 October 2007 197 Sample Upgrade Script File H Reregistration Timer Controls an H 323 protocol timer It is highly recommended you consult Avaya before changing this parameter SET REREGISTER 20 H CTI Status Controls the status of the Computer Telephony Interface 0 for disabled 1 for enabled SET CTISTAT 0 H CTI Port
148. d is made available based on the context of mouse selection When a text input control is on screen the user just clicks the input control The keyboard appears with the browser thrown into a small scrolling area The input control is roughly centered in the scrolling area The user can then press the software keys and the text is shown in the input control Simply pressing the Done button dismisses the keyboard and the input control shows the newly typed text While this interaction technically works fine it can be difficult to type a large amount of text from a user perspective So avoid user input unless it is absolutely necessary When necessary keep user input to a minimum Issue 7 October 2007 165 Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Click to Dial Functionality Embedded as lt a href Jjavascript dial nnnn gt nnnnis passed to the Phone application to initiate a telephone call Example lt html gt lt head gt lt body gt lt table border 0 width 100 gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt b gt Call IT Technical Support lt b gt lt br gt lt a href javascript dial 1 555 555 5151 gt lt img border 0 src call gif gt 1 555 555 5151 lt a gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt b gt Call Bill Pay lt b gt lt br gt lt a href javascript dial 1 555 555 5152 gt lt img border 0 src call gif gt 1 555 555 5152 lt a gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt body gt lt
149. d password are not overwritten by telephone software downloads The default ID is the MAC address of the telephone converted to ASCII format without colon separators and the default password is null Both the ID and password are set to defaults at manufacture EAP Response Identity frames use the ID in the Type Data field EAP Response MD5 Challenge frames use the password to compute the digest for the Value field leaving the Name field blank When a telephone is installed for the first time and 802 1x is in effect the dynamic address process prompts the installer to enter the Supplicant identity and password The IP telephone does not accept null value passwords See Dynamic Addressing in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide The IP telephone stores 802 1X credentials when successful authentication is achieved Post installation authentication attempts occur using the stored 802 1X credentials without prompting the user for ID and password entry An IP telephone can support several different 802 1X authentication scenarios depending on the capabilities of the Ethernet data switch to which it is connected Some switches may authenticate only a single device per switch port This is known as single supplicant or port based operation These switches typically send multicast 802 1X packets to authenticating devices Issue 7 October 2007 93 Server Administration These switches support the following three scenarios e Standalone
150. dd button When you are done click the Next button The Completing the New Scope Wizard dialog box displays Click the Finish button The new scope appears under your server in the DHCP tree The scope is not yet active and will not assign IP Addresses Highlight the newly created scope and select Action gt Properties from the menu Under Lease duration for DHCP clients select 2 weeks minimum and click the OK button CAUTION IP Address leases are kept active for varying periods of time To avoid having calls terminated suddenly ensure that the lease duration is not too short for example not set to less than two weeks A lease duration of two to four weeks is reasonable Issue 7 October 2007 69 Server Administration Adding DHCP Options Use the following procedure to add DHCP options to the scope you created in the previous procedure 1 On the DHCP window right click the Scope Options folder under the scope you created in the last procedure A drop down menu displays Click the Configure Options option The Scope Options dialog box displays In the General tab page under the Available Options check the 066 Boot Server Host Name Options checkbox The String Value dialog box displays Enter the TFTP Server address es in the String Value Use the same TFTPSRVR value format as discussed in TFTP Generic Setup on page 72 For example if you had a TFTP server at IP Address z2z 2z
151. dminister a switch with Avaya Communication Manager software This document is provided with the Avaya Communication Manager Release 3 12 product The following documents are available on the Web site listed under Online Documentation e Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager Software 555 233 504 This document describes how to administer Avaya Communication Manager software to implement Voice over IP VoIP applications for TCP IP for DCS signaling H 323 trunks and private networks e Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 03 300509 This document provides an overall reference for planning operating and administering your Avaya Communication Manager solution e Installation and Upgrades for Avaya G700 Media Gateway and Avaya S8300 Media Server 555 234 100 This document describes procedures for installing upgrading and performing initial configuration tasks for the Avaya G700 Media Gateway and the Avaya S8300 Media Server e Downloading Avaya 46xx IP Telephone Software Using Avaya Media Servers This White Paper provides information on using HTTP HTTPS or TFTP file transfer protocols to transfer Avaya 46xx IP telephone software from Avaya Media Servers to Avaya 46xx IP telephones e SIP Support in Release 3 0 of Avaya Communication Manager running on the Avaya S8300 S8500 and 8710 Media Server 555 245 206 This document describes requirements and introduces procedures for
152. dministering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones DNS Addressing e 6 oko bho Gabe e PSG oe e a a Stas ees Customizing the Site Specific Option Number SSON Entering Options Using the Telephone Dialpad Enhanced Local Dialing is so ce c sotem 60 cee che ee ew OES Setting the Date and Time on SIP IP Telephones 2 2 825 Setting the Dial Plan on SIP IP Telephones 2 20208588 Customizing the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone 200 8 2584s 4630 4630SW Backup Restore 2 20 ee eee ee ee ee Gall Log AChE 62054 4u Hi 6G 4G45G SSH e SESE HO TEESE Customizing 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones 22 e ee eee eee The Application Status Flag APPSTAT 2 2 000 8228 ee Backup Restore for 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones 00 228 ee eee eee Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Guidelines 4 4 Introduction a a o 6 wah S 6S Sw Se ok SO Se wee Se OS See Error COnditionS 4 lt s s 204 4 4864 0 84 DOO HO ea OO The Clear Administrative Option aaoo The Reset Administrative Option 2 6 6 ee Reset System Vales 266 6a kk wk AR EW eh we A OO RO Restart the Telephone 2 2 60 ee ee ee The View Administration Option 2 sooo Error Messages 1 1 44 4644445804 ORR ew a Troubleshooting the 4601 IP Telephone 2 2 ee ee ee ee es Appendix A Avaya 46xx
153. does not go back to the upgrade script file You can change the settings file name if desired as long as you also edit the corresponding GET command in the upgrade script file However we encourage you not to alter the Avaya provided upgrade script file If Avaya changes the upgrade script file in the future any changes you have made will be lost We strongly encourage you to use the 46xxsettings file to customize your settings instead For more details on customizing your settings file see Contents of the Settings File Choosing the Right Application File and Upgrade Script File The 4600 IP Telephone software Releases are bundled together in exe and zip files on the Avaya support Web site See 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files for a detailed description As of Release 2 7 you have four bundles from which to choose Only one bundle is likely to be optimal for any one environment Which bundle to choose depends on the answer to two questions e Which version of 4610SW 4620SW software do you need in that environment e Are the majority of your 4602 4602SW 4602SW 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW and 4625SW Telephones in that environment H 323 based or SIP based The 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones support multi byte characters so the software bundles come in one of four versions e a default version which only supports single byte characters like those used in English French Japanese K
154. e 16 Online Documentation 1 0 0 a a 16 Related DOCHINIGNS s ccc kee a SHER ED HORS HER HDT TE DES Ko 17 IETF Documents 464 620 cde08 8 Ht ea Seed a Owe dD SSeS 21 ITU Documents i e ahi oh doka SF ewe 4 oo hd eG a cae A ee a 23 ISO IEC ANSI IEEE Documents 2 000 ee ee eee eee 24 Customer SUNN kek ENDER EA OO EK we Ea Se ESS 24 Chapter 2 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols 25 INTOCUEHON 2 5 40 266 we ad ew DSS SOS ew de See SE Sew a HH 25 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP 1 2 2 eee ee 25 Data and Voice Network Similarities 2 200 2 ee eee ee 25 Delay and UNG 1 hac kad eS RS Te OSs 26 Tandem GOdINO 2 6 s cios a heed ede A teed cee oe bt 27 Voice Coding Standards 0 eee eee ee 27 Telephony Protocols 1 444 405 24844642 dA OE iii tsta 27 CAP ee Ga ook EE ED Ce EES EDA Se OE Oe EE eS 27 TFIP 2ittenee bb eecieperso beste viet eeckoa eee ee 28 IIP sr 8 hs AE de ey ee Ee gi Ge See Sy ec eee Ss ee ao Se Bie MU See 28 ONS sk 8 6 62 ROMERO EDO SSE A REED SAEED ETE DO OO SEG 28 NAT 6 a Ed eh we ee Re ee ew 29 Os te 6 a oe ee eee See 4 oe a eee eee oe ee 29 SNMP bck os tu Geese eeied Ceteseitaet SAoesed ease sheds 30 Network Assessment aaao 31 4600 Series IP Telephones naana ee ee 31 SOMWA 4 6 EMEA piia a anea aaa ROSS 32 DHCP and File Servers aaau eee 32 Ue an a a a a SG Oe ee E a rA E Se 33 Registration and Authentication n saoasaoa 33 Time to Ser
155. e Options scroll list click 176 46XXOPTION 3 Click the Value button 4 Verify that the Value String box contains the correct string from DHCP Generic Setup on page 59 If not update the string and click the OK button Verify the Global Option 176 46XXOPTION Use the following procedure to verify the global option 1 Select Global under DHCP OPTIONS 2 In the Active Options scroll list click 176 46XXOPTION 3 Click the Value button 4 Verify that the Value String box contains the correct value from DHCP Generic Setup on page 59 If not update the string and click the OK button Windows 2000 DHCP Server This section describes the configuration of the DHCP server in Windows 2000 Verifying the Installation of the DHCP Server Use the following procedure to verify whether the DHCP server is installed 1 Select Start gt Program gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management 2 Under Services and Applications in the Computer Management tree find DHCP 3 If DHCP is not installed install the DHCP server Otherwise proceed directly to Creating and Configuring a DHCP Scope for instructions on server configuration Issue 7 October 2007 67 Server Administration Creating and Configuring a DHCP Scope Use the following procedure to create and configure a DHCP scope 1 Select Start gt Programs gt Administrative Tools gt DHCP 2 In the console tree click the DHCP serverto which you want
156. e adjustment as follows L local time or U Universal Time and D is 1 or 2 ASCII digits representing the date of the month from 1 or 01 to 31 or the character L which means the last day of the month For example a value of 1SunApr2L means the first Sunday in April at 2AM local time and a value of 29Mar1U means March 29th at 1AM Universal Time DSTSTOP LSunOct2L Daylight Savings Time Stop Date for SIP telephones Valid values and format are the same as DSTSTART ENHDIALSTAT 1 Enhanced Dialing Status If set to 1 the Enhanced Local Dialing feature is turned on for all associated applications If set to 0 the feature is turned off FILTERLIST Null Contains zero or more additional addresses to be allowed through the IP source address filter in dotted decimal or DNS name format separated by commas 0 to 255 ASCII characters including commas See information on IP source address filtering in the Security section FTPSRVR Null IP Address of the FTP server on which an FTP backup restore file is stored Format is dotted decimal or DNS name with from 0 255 ASCII characters spaces not allowed Not applicable to 4601 or 4602 IP Telephones FTPDIR Null FTP server directory path on which an FTP backup restore file is stored Format is dotted decimal or DNS name with from 0 255 ASCII characters with spaces allowed 5 of 12 102 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Gu
157. e at the Password prompt Valid values are 0 Off 1 On For more information see Unnamed Registration VLANSEP 1 VLAN separation Controls whether frames to from the secondary Ethernet interface receive IEEE 802 1Q tagging treatment The tagging treatment enables frames to be forwarded based on their tags in a manner separate from telephone frames If tags are not changed no tag based forwarding is employed Values are 1 Change tags as necessary 2 Do not change tags VLANTEST 60 Number of seconds to wait fora DHCPOFFER when using a non zero VLAN ID 1 3 ASCII digits from 0 to 999 WMLIDLETIME 10 The number of minutes until the browser sends an HTTP GET command for the URI specified in WMLIDLEURI 1 to 3 ASCII numeric digits Valid values are 1 to 999 WMLIDLEURI Null The URI of the Web page displayed when WMLIDLETIME is reached and the HTTP GET is successful 12 of 12 Note The 4630 4630SW and 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW IP Telephones have additional optional administration See Customizing the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone on page 113 and Customizing 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones on page 118 for more information Issue 7 October 2007 109 Server Administration DNS Addressing As of Release 1 5 the 4600 IP Telephones support DNS addresses and dotted decimal addresses The telephone attempts to resolve a non ASCll encoded dotted decimal IP
158. e its capabilities including its ability to meet planned voice and data needs e A determination of network objectives including the dominant traffic type selection of technologies and setting voice quality objectives The assessment should leave you confident that the implemented network will have the capacity for the foreseen data and voice traffic and can support H 323 SIP DHCP TFTP HTTP and jitter buffers in all applications It is important to distinguish between compliance with the minimal VoIP standards and QoS support the latter being a requirement to run VoIP on your configuration 4600 Series IP Telephones The 4600 Series IP Telephones support either of two signaling protocol families H 323 and Session Initiation Protocol SIP The H 323 standard developed by ITU T provides for real time audio video and data communications transmission over a packet network An H 323 telephone protocol stack comprises several protocols e H 225 for registration admission status RAS and call signaling e H 245 for control signaling e Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP and e Real Time Control Protocol RTCP Issue 7 October 2007 31 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols SIP was developed by the IETF Like H 323 SIP provides for real time audio video and data communications transmission over a packet network SIP uses various messages or methods to provide e Registration REGISTER e Call s
159. e level of sidetone in the headset H setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL 7 six levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL 9 two levels louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHD 0 Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the handset 226 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction H setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL H 7 six levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL 9 two levels louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHS 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH WML BROWSER SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH The WMLHOME setting is used to enable and administer the Web Application HH The WMLIDLEURI setting acts as an idle screen when the phone has been idle see WMLIDLETIME value By default this URL is NULL and this screen is not activated NOTE Avaya hosts a web site for IP Phones The WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI parameters are set up to point your IP telephones to this
160. e logical OR symbol When the dialed digits match a format string in the dial plan the call is initiated The DIALPLAN parameter defines the dial plan Valid characters in a format string and their meanings are as follows digits 0 through 9 inclusive Specific dialpad digits the dialpad character the dialpad character but only if it is the first character in the dialed string see below 112 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Customizing the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone X any dialpad digit i e 0 9 Z or z present dial tone to the user for example for Feature Access Code FAC entry any one character within the brackets is a valid match for a dial plan string any one digit between the bounds within the brackets inclusive is a match the character preceding the can repeat 0 or more additional times for a valid match Dial plan example 2 4 xxx 68 xxx xx 9Z1xXxXXXXXXXX 9Z011X where 2 4 xxx Four digit dial extensions with valid extensions starting with 2 3 or 4 68 xxx Four digit dial extensions with valid extensions starting with 6 or 8 xx Two digit Feature Access Codes preceded by a 9Z1xXxXxxxxxxxx Network Access Code 9 for an outside line followed by dial tone followed by any string of 10 digits typical instance of Automatic Route Selection ARS for standard US long distance number 9z011x Network Access Code 9 for an outside
161. e the following procedure to activate the new scope 1 In the DHCP console tree click the IP Telephone Scope you just created 2 From the Action menu select Activate The small red down arrow over the scope icon disappears indicating that the scope was activated TFTP H 323 Only This section describes how to set up a TFTP server for downloading software updates to the 4600 Series IP Telephones CAUTION The files defined by the TFTP server configuration have to be accessible from all IP telephones Ensure that the filenames match the names in the upgrade script including case since UNIX systems are case sensitive Note SIP IP telephones download upgrade script files and hence firmware and settings files from HTTP servers only You can use any TFTP application you want However Avaya recommends using the TFTP server capability on the S8300 media server or the Avaya IP Telephone File Server Application Issue 7 October 2007 71 Server Administration TFTP Generic Setup The following phases are involved in setting up a TFTP server e Install the TFTP server software e Configure the file path parameter to the directory where the files are to be stored This is the file path in Table 3 Required Network Information Before Installation Per DHCP Server on page 57 For increased security we also recommend that you disable the ability to upload to the server Note that this option might not be available to all TFT
162. e with Logoff DOT 1X 0 or 1 The attached PC must be running 802 1X supplicant software Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Release 2 6 4600 Series IP Telephones support IEEE 802 1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is an open standards layer 2 protocol IP telephones use to advertise their identity and capabilities and to receive administration from an LLDP server LAN equipment can use LLDP to manage power administer VLANs and provide some administration The transmission and reception of LLDP is specified in IEEE 802 1AB 2005 The 4600 Series IP Telephones use Type Length Value TLV elements specified in IEEE 802 1AB 2005 TIA TR 41 Committee Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED ANSI TIA 1057 and Proprietary elements LLDP Data Units LLDPDUs are sent to the LLDP Multicast MAC address 01 80 c2 00 00 0e 94 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP A 4600 Series IP Telephone initiates LLDP after receiving an LLDPDU message from an appropriate system Once initiated the telephones send an LLDPDU every 30 seconds with the following contents Table 8 LLDPDU Transmitted by the 4600 Series IP Telephones Category TLV Name Type TLV Info String Value Basic Mandatory Chassis ID IPv4 IP Address of telephone Basic Mandatory Port ID MAC address of the telephone Basic Mandatory Time To Live 120 seconds Basic Optional System Name The Host Name sent to the DHCP server in
163. ecify settings that vary from defaults although specifying defaults is harmless DNSSRVR dnsexample yourco com DIRSRVR 123 123 123 123 DIRTOPDN yourco WMLHOME http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4620 home wml WEBPROXY 11 11 11 11 As of Release 2 4 VLAN separation provides for tagged frames to be received by a secondary Ethernet interface typically a PC Add commands to the 46xxsettings txt file to enable VLAN separation provide the VLAN ID for tagged frames received on the secondary Ethernet interface and set the Layer 2 priority for those tagged frames The following example assumes the data VLAN ID is yyy and the data traffic priority is z SET VLANSEP 1 SET PHY2VLAN yyy SET PHY2PRIO z 80 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide The GROUP System Value The GROUP System Value You might have different communities of end users all of which have the same model telephone but which require different administered settings For example you might want to restrict Call Center agents from being able to Logoff which might be an essential capability for hot desking associates Or you might want to assign your SIP telephone users to different messaging systems or registration proxy servers We provide examples of the group settings for each of these situations later in this section As of Release 2 8 Communication Manager Release 3 1 3 and above supports the downloading of the
164. ection presents guidelines for developing a good model that effectively presents Web pages for 4630 IP Telephone Web Browser viewing The biggest challenge in designing pages for this browser is the limited amount of space available for viewing the pages The 4630 IP Telephone screen is a 1 4 VGA display Part of that screen is lost to the browser by the 4630 IP Telephone s main controls Page layout must be effective and efficient to avoid causing more lost space through additional screen controls like scrollbars Font sizing can make or break a page s usability You must find a balance between fitting as much text as is possible and allowing users to read the text without straining their eyes Fixed Width Objects One of a Web browser s primary functions is to present text wrapped at the browser window s right border When dealing with internationalization text would wrap at the left border The browser always attempts to avoid adding a horizontal scrollbar However if you use fixed width objects like tables and pre formatted lt pre gt tag text wrapping becomes secondary to presenting the data exactly as HTML dictates Web browsers do not resize themselves larger when you add scrollbars Thus if there are more lines of text than can fit in the browser window s height a vertical scrollbar is added This now takes up some of the width of the browser and less text displays on a single line If text is wider than the browser s w
165. ed and issued in September 2007 to support Software Release 2 8 3 This version introduces new audio parameters and changes to audio parameter settings guidance on a troubleshooting issue related to Message Waiting Indicators and Communication Manager 3 1 3 and above support for downloading of four key administrative parameters to individual phones 12 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Document Organization What s New in Issue 7 New material in this issue to support Release 2 8 3 software includes Expansion Threshold audio parameters have been converted to Noise Reduction parameters The Transmit Gain audio parameter has been changed to Headset Transmit Gain AUDIOSTHD AUDIOSTHS and AUDIOENV have increased range of values As of Release 2 8 Communication Manager Release 3 1 3 and above supports downloading of four key parameters which previously had to be administered either through the settings file or through local procedures at each phone Parameters are e SNMP Community String e SNMP Source Address es e PROCPSWD the password entered to access local procedures e GROUP the Group identifier Terms Used in This Guide 802 1D 802 1Q 802 1X ARP CELP CLAN CNA DHCP DiffServ DNS 802 1Q defines a layer 2 frame structure that supports VLAN identification and a QoS mechanism usually referred to as 802 1D Authentication method for a protocol requiring a network device to au
166. eds key information about the servers providing those facilities Specifically you need to provide the information relevant sections of Table 12 call for You must provide this information in a customized script file in accordance with 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files on page 76 CAUTION For a 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW or 4625SW to work properly you must have a 46xxsettings txt file in the same directory as the 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW application file If you do not edit the 46xxsettings txt file those telephones use default settings only The 46xxsettings file is no longer part of the zip file on the Avaya software download Web site but is available as a stand alone download If you already have such a file because you downloaded it for a previous 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW or 4625SW IP Telephone release installing the stand alone file overwrites the original file Note The 4610SW 4620 4620SW and the 4630 4630SW IP Telephones use the same 46xxsettings txt file In Table 12 parameters shown with a Mandatory status must be accurate and non null for the application to work You can change parameters with an Optional status to suit your environment If you do not change parameters their defaults are used Table 12 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters Parameter Name Default Value Status Description and Value Range
167. ee Step 3 Telephone and File Server on page 35 under Initialization Process In addition you can edit an associated settings file to customize telephone parameters for your specific environment See Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 H 323 Registration and Authentication The Avaya Media Server supports using the extension and password to register and authenticate 4600 Series IP Telephones For further information see Related Documents on page 17 Time to Service TTS The IP Endpoint Time to Service TTS feature introduced in the R2 8 software release along with the Communication Manager 4 0 release changes the way IP endpoints register with their gatekeeper reducing the time to come into service Currently IP endpoints are brought into service in two steps which are coupled 1 H 323 registration and 2 TCP socket establishment for call signaling The TTS feature de couples these steps In CM 4 0 IP endpoints can be enabled for service with just the registration step TCP sockets are established later as needed The TTS feature also changes the direction of socket establishment With TTS Communication Manager rather than the endpoint initiates socket establishment which further improves performance In CM 4 0 TTS is enabled by default but can be disabled for all IP endpoints in a given IP network regions by changing the IP Network form TTS applies only to IP endpoints whose
168. ems In Table 18 the Error Messages shown in the first column correspond to the equivalent conditions described in Chapter 4 of the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide and Table 16 Possible Error Messages During Installation or Operation of 4600 Series IP Issue 7 October 2007 147 Troubleshooting Guidelines Telephones However rather than displaying messages the 4601 turns its LEDs on and off to indicate an error condition as described in Table 18 s second column In addition not all error conditions result in unique LED indications Table 18 Possible Operation Error Message Error Messages During 4601 IP Telephone Installation or 4601 Visual Indication Cause Resolution Extension Error Extension in Use IP Address in use by another No Ethernet VISUAL INDICATION Message Waiting indicators at top of telephone and the left middle of the faceplate display a broken flutter for a total of 5 cycles with one cycle being alternating 50 milliseconds on 50 milliseconds off for 500 milliseconds followed by 500 milliseconds off CAUSE The PBX does not recognize the extension entered or cannot find a valid gatekeeper RESOLUTION Confirm the extension is correct and is correctly administered on the switch Then try registration again taking particular care to enter the extension accurately VISUAL INDICATION If the extension is being used the 4601 attempts registration The first attempt cau
169. ephone 4612 IP Telephone User Guide 555 233 777 This document provides detailed information about using the 4612 IP Telephone 4620 4620SW 4621SW IP Telephone User Guide 555 233 781 This document provides detailed information about using the 4620 4620SW and 4621SW IP Telephones 4620SW 4621SW SIP IP Telephone User Guide 16 300474 This document provides detailed information about using the 4620SW and 4621SW SIP IP Telephones 4622SW IP Telephone User Guide 16 300297 This document provides detailed information about using the 4622SW IP Telephone 4624 IP Telephone User Guide 555 233 776 This document provides detailed information about using the 4624 IP Telephone 4625SW IP Telephone User Guide 16 300298 This document provides detailed information about using the 4625SW IP Telephone 4630 4630SW IP Telephone User Guide 555 233 764 This document provides detailed information about using the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Avaya 4690 IP Conference Telephone User Guide 555 233 787 This document provides detailed information about using the 4690 IP Conference Telephone 460 1 4602 4602SW IP Telephone Stand Instructions 555 233 147 This document provides information on how to desk or wall mount a 4601 or 4602 4602SW IP Telephone and a 4602 4602SW SIP IP Telephone 4610SW IP Telephone Stand Instructions 555 233 165 This document provides information on how to desk or wall mount a 4610SW IP or SIP IP Telephone 46
170. ephones is located at the following URL http www avaya com support 16 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Related Documents Related Documents e DEFINITY ECS Enterprise Communication Server Documentation Release 8 4 This CD contains documentation that describes among other things how to administer a DEFINITY ECS switch with Release 8 4 software This document is provided with the DEFINITY Release 8 4 product e DEFINITY ECS Enterprise Communication Server Documentation Release 9 This CD contains documentation that describes among other things how to administer a DEFINITY ECS switch with Release 9 software This document is provided with the DEFINITY Release 9 product e DEFINITY ECS Enterprise Communication Server Documentation Release 10 This CD contains documentation that describes among other things how to administer a DEFINITY ECS switch with Release 10 software This document is provided with the DEFINITY Release 10 product e Audio Quality Tuning for IP Telephones Issue 2 This document describes how to administer audio parameters for the 4600 telephones e Avaya Communication Manager Software Documentation Release 1 1 This document describes how to administer a switch with Avaya Communication Manager software This document is provided with the Avaya Communication Manager Release 1 1 product e Avaya Communication Manager Software Documentation Release 1 2 This document describes how
171. er the telephone 3 of the 4600 IP Telephone Installation Guide 802 1X DHCP IEEE 802 1X on page 92 Settings file IEEE 802 1X on page 92 Manual administration at 802 1X Supplicant Authentication and Set the the telephone 802 1X Operational Mode in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide SNMP DHCP DHCP on page 58 Settings file 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files on page 76 and 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters on page 98 Application DHCP DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and specific especially DHCP on page 58 parameters Also Customizing the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone on page 113 and Customizing 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones on page 118 Settings file DHCP and File Servers on page 56 especially strongly recommended LLDP TFTP H 323 Only on page 71 Also Customizing the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone on page 113 and Customizing 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones on page 118 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP on page 94 2 of 2 General information about administering DHCP servers is covered in DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and more specifically DHCP on page 58 General information about administering TFTP servers is covered in DHCP and File Servers and more specifically TFTP H 323 Only on page 71 General information about administering HTTP servers is covered in DHCP and File
172. er TLSSRVR to the address es of the Avaya HTTP server Note TLS is supported only on an Avaya server Issue 7 October 2007 73 Server Administration HTTP Configuration for Backup Restore In addition to the procedures in this section you can use the Avaya File Server Application for configuration firmware file download and backup restore You can download this application from http www avaya com support In general if you are migrating from FTP to HTTP all you need to do is administer the 46XX settings file to point to the correct file server by using HTTPSRVR as described in Table 10 and then follow the steps below For IIS Web Servers For IIS 4 0 WinNT4 0 IIS 5 0 Win2000 IIS 5 1 WinXP IIS 6 0 Win2003 1 Create a backup folder under the root directory of your Web server All backup files will be stored in that directory For example if your backup folder is C Inetpub wwwroot backup the 46xxsettings txt file should have a line similar to SET BRURI http www website com backup If your backup folder is the root directory the 46xxsettings txt file should have a line similar to SET BRURI http www website com 2 Use Internet Information Services Manager or Internet Information Services depending on your OS Go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools 3 Right click on the folder created for backup or right click on Default Web Site if there is no
173. ered with MCIPADD Issue 7 October 2007 61 Server Administration Administer DHCP servers to deliver only the options specified in this document Administering additional unexpected options might have unexpected consequences including possibly causing the IP telephone to ignore the DHCP server The media server name and TFTP server name must each be no more than 32 characters in length Note Examples of good DNS administration include Option 6 aaa aaa aaa aaa Option 15 dnsexample yourco com Option 66 tftpserver yourco com ZZZ ZZZ ZZZ ZZZ Option 176 MCIPADD XXX XXX XXX XXX Depending on the DHCP application you choose be aware that the application most likely will not immediately recycle expired DHCP leases An expired lease might remain reserved for the original client for a day or more For example Windows NT DHCP reserves expired leases for about one day This reservation period protects a client s lease for a short time If the client and the DHCP server are in two different time zones the computers clocks are not in synch or the client is not on the network when the lease expires there is time to correct the situation The following example shows the implication of having a reservation period Assume two IP Addresses therefore two possible DHCP leases Assume three IP telephones two of which are using the two available IP Addresses When the lease of the first two telephones expi
174. erent Gatekeepers See Administering 4600 Series IP Telephones on Avaya Media Servers H 323 Only DHCP TFTP H 323 Only and HTTP CAUSE The user is on a call when the network connection between the telephone and call server is interrupted but the call stays connected The telephone automatically starts procedures to register with the call server again However until registration succeeds the user has no access to Avaya Communication Manager features and functionality This message alerts users to the lack of connection to the call server RESOLUTION This is the same message with the same implications and Resolution as RESOLUTION Wait for a valid registration to occur or press to interrupt the search and re initialize manual or DHCP script files procedures on page 141 6 of 7 146 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Troubleshooting the 4601 IP Telephone Table 16 Possible Error Messages During Installation or Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Error Message Cause Resolution Current options and CAUSE An attempt to save the current options and Speed Speed Dial entries have Dial entries on the FTP server has not yet been made or is not yet been backed up in progress RESOLUTION Wait for a message stating that backup was successful The FTP Server Name is CAUSE Invalid or missing server name not known Please check RESOLUTION Verify the FTPSRVR address
175. erify that all the hardware requirements are met Failure to do so prevents the telephone from working and might have a negative impact on your network The following hardware is required for 4600 Series IP Telephones supporting H 323 to work properly Note The recommended configuration is the latest PBX software and the latest IP telephone firmware In the event your site does not have the latest PBX software follow the recommendations in the table immediately following Issue 7 October 2007 47 Requirements Media Server Avaya IP IP Telephone Release H 323 only Telephone Release Notes Avaya Communication All telephones R2 8 Manager 4 0 Avaya Communication 4601 4602 R2 7 Manager 3 1 and 4625SW Avaya Communication All telephones R2 6 Manager 3 0 except 4601 4602 4602SW and 4625SW Avaya Communication All telephones R1 8 Use the latest release Manager 1 3 Avaya Communication All telephones R1 8 Use the latest release Manager 1 1 except 4630 Avaya Communication Manager 1 2 R10 Avaya 4630 R1 74 Upgrade to Avaya Communication Communication Manager Manager 1 1 Release 1 3 or later before installing R1 8 on 4630 Avaya Communication Telephones Manager 1 2 R10 4606 R1 8 The 4602 and 4620 are not 4612 supported 4624 R9 5 4606 R1 8 The 4620 4602 and 4630 are 4612 not supported 4624 R1 5 is the minimum 4600 IP Telephone vintage R9 4612 R1 1 R1 1 is the only supported 4624 4600 IP Telephone vintage R8
176. ers with TFTP running telephones with older releases and HTTP for telephones capable of using HTTP You need TFTP servers for upgrades if you have a release prior to R2 2 on a telephone Currently only Avaya servers support 4600 Series IP Telephone file transfers using HTTPS The reason is 4600 Series IP Telephones only establish encrypted TLS connections with servers that use Avaya signed digital certificates A telephone that supports HTTP will attempt to access the HTTP server if administered and if successful will not attempt to access the TFTP server if administered The script files application files and settings files discussed in this section are identical for HTTP and TFTP servers The general downloading process for those files is essentially the same One exception is that when you use an HTTPS server a TLS server is contacted first Therefore we use the generic term file server here to mean both TFTP server and HTTP server The telephone queries the file server which transmits a script file to the telephone This script file ata minimum tells the telephone which application file the telephone must use The application file is the software that has the telephony functionality and can be easily updated for future enhancements The telephone uses the script file to determine if it has the proper application file A newly installed telephone may have no application file and therefore would not have the pr
177. ers the most recent dialable character before it automatically begins dialing A value of 0 disables the wait timer The default is 5 and valid values are 0 10 seconds MUSICSRVR is not currently used and should be ignored or set to null Issue 7 October 2007 201 Sample Upgrade Script File MWISRVR sets the IP Address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN of the Message Waiting server The default is null but valid values are zero or more IP addresses in dotted decimal or DNS format separated by commas without intervening spaces to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters PHNNUMOFSA sets the number of Session Appearances the telephone should support The default is 3 and valid values are 1 5 HH SIPREGISTRAR sets the IP Address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN of the SIP registration server s The default is null but valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS format separated by commas without intervening spaces to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters SIP Settings Examples SET CALLFWDSTAT 3 SET CALLFWDDELAY 5 SET CALLFWDADDR cover avaya com SET COVERAGEADDR cover avaya com SET DATESEPARATOR SET DATETIMEFORMAT 0 SET DIALPLAN 23 xxxx 91xxxxxxxxxx 9 2 9 xxxxxxxxx SET DIALWAIT 5 SET MUSICSRVR SET MWISRVR 192 168 0 7 SET PHNNUMOFSA 3 SET SIPREGISTRAR
178. es and e The Call Log is more than 50 filled with unarchived entries Or when a new unarchived log entry occurs within two hours of the last archive whichever occurs first Call Log Archive automatically saves applicable Call Log entries When the Call Log Automatic Archive option on a 4630 4630SW IP Telephone is set to Yes and the FTPSRVR is specified the FTP APPE command attempts to save all call log contents to the FTP server The FTP Server is the FTPSRVR value in the FTPDIR directory path The file 4630calllog txt saves the data The System Administrator can optionally specify FTPSRVR and or FTPDIR by network administration However the telephone user can also specify these values Chapter 8 of the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone User Guide covers user specification Automatic backup occurs whenever the user executes a Save command on a Speed Dial or Options Parameter screen Note For specific error messages relating to Archiving see Table 17 Possible Error Messages During 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW and 4630 4630SW Backup Restore on page 147 Issue 7 October 2007 117 Server Administration Customizing 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones The 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621 SW 4622SW 4625SW IP Telephones have some unique and powerful capabilities that take advantage of their display and access to LAN facilities If your LAN has an LDAP compliant directory or a WML Web site the telephone ne
179. es of the Backup Restore filename to allow seamless upgrades from 4620s if applicable The system administrator can optionally set the backup option and specify FTPSRVR or HTTPSRVR through network administration A telephone user can also specify these values as covered in Chapter 6 of the appropriate User Guide for the telephone type Automatic backup occurs whenever the user executes a Save command on a Speed Dial or Options Parameter screen Note Users can specify alternate servers and directories for example their own PCs for backups and retrievals The 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621 SW 4622SW 4625SW backup restore file can contain ASCII Extended ASCII and non ASCII characters However if the file contains non ASCII characters specifically Cyrillic Hebrew Katakana Han or Hiragana characters the file must be stored in UTF 8 form The 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621 SW 4622SW 4625SW creates a file in this form automatically But if you opt to create a backup restore file yourself or edit this file you must do both of the following 1 Insert a blank line at the beginning of the file and 2 Save the file in UTF 8 format These precautions ensure that regardless of how your editor stores the data file the telephone can read the contents If you fail to insert the blank line the first line of data Issue 7 October 2007 123 Server Administration might be ignored The 4620 does not support displays of Cyrillic Hebrew Han or Hiragana
180. et RESOLUTION Add the IP Address es using static addressing manual telephone setting updating the settings file or normally through DHCP administration CAUSE A problem with the list of SIP registration proxy servers RESOLUTION Review the server administration to ensure that the correct addresses are specified Verify the proper operation of the Registration Server s and the intervening network CAUSE The telephone has registered with the call server but network problems have prevented the telephone from opening a TCP socket Note This message only occurs on older software versions Telephones with newer software automatically reset RESOLUTION Press the button to reset the telephone and contact the Network System Administrator to report the network problem CAUSE An invalid PBX Registration password has been entered RESOLUTION Re enter the password if entered incorrectly If appropriate verify proper password with respect to switch administration 4of7 144 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Error Messages Table 16 Possible Error Messages During Installation or Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Error Message Cause Resolution Registering SIP only Registration Failed SIP only Resource Error Timeout Error Unauthorized SIP only Undefined Error Wrong Set Type CAUSE It is normal for this message to occasionally ap
181. ettings HHHHHH END HAHAH END OF CONFIGURATION FILE 4 244 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Index Numerical 4600 Series IP Telephones Bt Administering on Avaya Media Servers H 323 ONY So Sask haa He a a A eA e iG 55 Administering Options for 98 Administration Alternatives and Options 52 Creating Web Sites for 02 169 DHCP and File Servers 2 32 DNS Addressing 110 Initialization Process 34 Network Audio Quality Display 85 estat 2 ec eee Ge we ae BR 136 Scripts and Application Files 76 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones Administering Thin Client Directories for 171 Application Status Flag APPSTAT 121 Backup Restore onoo 123 Customizable System Parameters 118 Customizing 2000 118 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Backup Restore 116 Call Log Archive 117 Creating Web Sites for 02 153 Customizable System Parameters 114 customizing 2 2 2 ee eee 113 46xx IP Telephone MIB 0 4 151 10a D O E ae E E E E EE E E 92 A About This Guide 02 9 Administering 4600 Series IP Telephones on Avaya Media Servers 2 ee ee ee 5 Administering DHCP and File Servers 56 Administering H 323 and SIP IP Telephones on the Same Network
182. evant files to an HTTP server and administer the HTTPSRVR parameter accordingly CAUSE Unnamed registration is enabled and the user did not provide an extension and password at the Extension prompt RESOLUTION Instruct the user to enter the extension and password Alternately disable unnamed registration CAUSE The telephone s FTP Backup Restore feature is enabled The user specified a setting file for the PC Ethernet Interface setting through the Options menu The user specified setting is overriding the Local Procedure PHY2STAT setting RESOLUTION Use the Options menu to change the setting to the value you want so the INT local procedure is not necessary Alternatively use the Options menu to change the PC Ethernet Interface setting to Auto negotiation Then make all future changes using the INT local procedure 6 of 6 Issue 7 October 2007 131 Troubleshooting Guidelines There are three areas where installers can troubleshoot problems before seeking assistance from the system or LAN administrator 1 Check the power and Ethernet wiring to ensure that e all components are plugged in correctly e there is LAN connectivity in both directions to all servers DHCP TFTP HTTP call server Note that if the telephone is attached to a 30A switched hub upon loss of Ethernet connectivity the usual No Ethernet message is not displayed e if the telephone is supposed to be powered from the LAN ensure that the LAN
183. f the individual phone PROCSTAT 0 Local dialpad Administrative Options status O all Administrative Options are allowed 1 only VIEW is allowed PUSHCAP 222 Push capabilities audio receive push value hundreds Web push value tens or Top Line value Any values other than combinations of 0 1 and or 2 are treated as 0 disabled Values are 000 to 999 defined as 0 Push disabled 1 Normal only push allowed 2 Normal and or barge on push allowed For example if the value is 222 everything is allowed if the value is 111 no barge in is allowed and the value 200 signifies both a normal and barge in audio push but not a Web or Top Line push PUSHPORT 80 Destination TCP port for the telephone s HTTP server Valid values are 80 to 65535 QKLOGINSTAT 1 Quick Login Status Valid values are 0 Delete H 323 registration password upon user logoff 1 Retain H 323 registration password upon user logoff Applies only to Releases 2 7 and later REGISTERWAIT 3600 SIP Re registration Interval The SIP registration expiration interval in seconds sent to the SIP registrar during registration Valid values are 1 to 5 ASCII numeric characters from 0 to 65535 Null is not a valid value and the value may not contain spaces 9 of 12 106 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable Syste
184. fault system language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSYS mlf_s12_v10_german txt 238 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction Larger Text Font File name Specifies the loadable language file on the HTTP server for the Large Text Font 0 to 32 ASCII characters SET LANGLARGEFONT mlf_s12_v10_english_large txt GOTO END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 9630 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH a ciaTae TiRIRIEIRIL aie TRIRIRIAIRITIEIRIRIRIRIRTRIRITIAIRIRRIAIEIRIRIATRIRITIRIMIRITIRIAIRITGRIRIRIRITIATRIEGRIR ET SETTINGS9640 ETRE PEER TREE EAE TEE ET AEE BEE A BEET EE EE HH This section contains the phone model specific settings for the 9640 telephone HHHHHHHHHH HAHAH AUDIO SETTINGS HHHHHHHAHHHHAHH Headset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the headset setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 one level softer than NORMAL 2 two levels softer than NORMAL 3 three levels softer than NORMAL 4 OFF inaudible 5 one level louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHD 0 Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the handset setting level O NORMAL level for most users default 1 one level softer than NORMAL 2 two levels softer than NORMAL 3 three levels softer than NORMAL 4 OFF inaudible 5 one level louder than NORMAL
185. fines an area for a set of frames e lt frame gt defines a single frame in a frameset e lt iframe gt defines an in line frame e lt noframes gt provides a fallback for browsers that don t handle frames If the designer intends to use frames and make these pages available to the telephone this tag should certainly be employed See the Design Guidelines on page 163 for information on displaying frames Forms HTML forms provide the user the ability to enter data into a Web browser This data can then be passed to the Web server for processing It is difficult to predict what Web designers might have in mind for the 4630 IP Telephone Web Browser However all forms related tags have been verified and the results are presented here e lt form gt defines the basic input form and defines the action to be performed when the Submit button is selected through the action attribute 160 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Browser Features and Behavior e lt input gt defines most user input The type of attribute defines the type of input to use The lt button gt tag was created to replace type values of button reset and submit in a cleaner more flexible way Other type values available are checkbox hidden image password radio and text The type value file is useless in this browser s context since this control s intent is to allow the user to select a file on their local disk e lt button gt defines
186. g sequence of keys on the faceplate of the telephone Mute 73738 Mute RESET Note Press the Mute button momentarily Do not press this button while pressing other keys buttons The 4630 4630SW IP Telephones and the 4690 IP Conference Telephone do not have a dedicated Hold button For all other 4600 Series IP Telephones pressing the Hold button instead of the Mute button also works The 4601 IP Telephone flashes both Message Waiting Indicators 500 milliseconds on 500 milliseconds off to indicate user input is expected All other IP telephones display the following text left justified at the top of the display Reset values no yes 2 Press the button to reset values to their defaults or to continue a restart without resetting the values to their defaults Pressing the pound sign to reset the system values on a 4601 IP Telephone produces a confirmation tone The 4601 s Message Waiting indicators illuminate but do not flash to indicate no entry is allowed while the system values are being reset All other phones display the following text left justified at the top of the display while the system values are reset to defaults Resetting values Once the system values are reset the following prompt displays on all IP telephones except the 4601 Restart phone no yes 3 Press the key to terminate the procedure without restarting the telephone Press the key to restart the tele
187. hat can communicate with WML servers 3 of 3 Issue 7 October 2007 15 Introduction Conventions Used in This Guide This guide uses the following textual symbolic and typographic conventions to help you interpret information Symbolic Conventions Note This symbol precedes additional information about a topic This information is not required to run your system AX CAUTION This symbol emphasizes possible harm to software possible loss of data or possible service interruptions Typographic Conventions This guide uses the following typographic conventions command Words printed in this type are commands that you enter into your system message Words printed in this type are system messages device Words printed in this type indicate parameters associated with a command for which you must substitute the appropriate value For example when entering the mount command device must be replaced with the name of the drive that contains the installation disk Administrative Words printed in bold type are menu or screen titles and labels Words printed in bold type can also be items on menus and screens that you select or enter to perform a task i e fields buttons or icons Bold type also provides general emphasis for words or concepts italics Italic type indicates a document that contains additional information about a topic Online Documentation The online documentation for the 4600 Series IP Tel
188. hat can never be seen Minimal screen real estate and scrolling issues make frames something to avoid Fonts Font size is a major concern in the browser Without designer intervention the browser displays text as if it were running on a PC in a normal width and height display This means that the fonts shown appear huge relative to the screen size As a result only seven lines of text can be viewed in the browser when no font sizing is applied Additionally only about 25 characters are viewable per line From a practical point of view this situation is not usable To make the browser usable perform some form of font sizing to allow a reasonable amount of text to be viewed per screen Ideally put font sizing in a single external style sheet and make all pages reference this style sheet Do not set font sizes in document level style sheets or even worse for in line style sheets or lt font gt tags Doing so makes it very difficult for the designer to update font changes and runs the risk of failing to make a universal change Use a single external style sheet to manage consistency in the pages Define fonts using a static external style sheet You can also generate a style sheet dynamically using some form of server side application such as a CGI script or a Java servlet Dynamic style sheet generation allows the server to decide per user what font size to use This in turn allows the user to notify the server to change the font size Al
189. hat value after you press Mute and before you press RE SET As of Release 2 8 Communication Manager Release 3 1 3 and above supports the downloading of the PROCPSWD SNMPSTRING SNMPADD and GROUP settings upon registration of the individual phone Reset System Values Use the following procedure to reset all system initialization values to the application software default values CAUTION This procedure erases all static information without any possibility of recovering the data 1 While the telephone is on hook and idle press the following sequence of keys on the faceplate of the telephone Mute 7 3 7 3 8 Mute RESET Note Press the Mute button momentarily Do not press this button while pressing other keys buttons The 4630 4630SW IP Telephones and the 4690 IP Conference Telephone do not have a dedicated Hold button For all other 4600 Series IP Telephones pressing the Hold button instead of the Mute button also works 134 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide The Reset Administrative Option The 4601 IP Telephone flashes both Message Waiting indicators 500 milliseconds on 500 milliseconds off to indicate user input is expected All other IP telephones display the following text left justified at the top of the display Reset values no yes CAUTION All static information is erased without any possibility of recovering the data as soon as you press the button If
190. he call appropriately Note The Enhanced Local Dialing algorithm requires that telephone numbers be presented in a standard format The standard format depends on how you administer the parameters indicated in Table 12 The algorithm also assumes that international telephone numbers are identified as such in for example WML Web sites This is indicated by preceding that type of number with a plus sign and a space or some non digit character following the country code Setting the Date and Time on SIP IP Telephones SIP IP telephones need a source of date and time information This typically comes from a network time server running the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP The telephones use several administrative parameters for this functionality The parameter SNTPSRVR defines the server s IP Address es GMTOFFSET defines the offset from Greenwich Mean Time GMT DSTSTART and DSTSTOP define the start and end of Daylight Savings Time respectively DSTOFFSET defines the Daylight Savings Time offset from Standard Time Finally DATETIMEFORMAT defines the format of the date and time display See Table 10 for definitions and valid values for SIP Date and Time parameters Setting the Dial Plan on SIP IP Telephones A dial plan is used during manual dialing to allow a call to be initiated without using a Send button and without waiting for the expiration of a timeout interval The dial plan consists of one or more format strings separated by th
191. he phones To find more information about SNMP and MIBs see the IETF references listed in Related Documents on page 17 The Avaya Custom MIB for the 4600 Series IP Telephones is available for download in txt format on the Avaya support Web site This Custom MIB is common to both H 323 and SIP IP telephones Objects that are not relevant to a given telephone have Null data 30 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Network Assessment Network Assessment The current technology allows optimum network configurations to deliver VoIP with perceived voice quality close to that of the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN Not all networks can take advantage of packet voice transmissions Some data networks have insufficient residual capacity for even compressed voice traffic In addition the usual approach to developing data networks by integrating products from many vendors requires testing the components for Voice over IP traffic compatibility Avaya assumes that your organization has performed a network assessment with or without Avaya s assistance before attempting to install Voice over IP The network assessment provides a high degree of confidence that the existing data network has the capacity to carry voice packet traffic The network assessment assures that the existing data network is compatible with the required technology A network assessment should include e A network audit to review existing equipment and evaluat
192. he provided URL with the URL of your site NOTE Your network must be using Domain Name Services DNS for the Avaya hosted site settings to operate properly The URL of your 4630 Home page The default is null but you can specify any other valid URL up to 255 characters in length SET WEBHOME hittp support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4630 index htm Your HTTP proxy server address name or IP Address This text string contains zero or one IP Address in dotted decimal or DNS format identifying an HTTP Proxy Server The default is null and you may not need to set this parameter if all Web pages to be viewed by the phone user are on your organization s intranet SET WEBPROXY my proxy company com The TCP port number of your HTTP proxy server The default is 80 but WEBPORT is ignored if WEBPROXY is null SET WEBPORT 80 A list of one or more HTTP proxy server exception domains Accesses to these addresses will not go through the proxy server The default is null but valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS format separated by commas Issue 7 October 2007 229 Sample Upgrade Script File without intervening spaces to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters SET WEBEXCEPT mycompany com 135 20 21 20 HE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH 4630 Emergency Contact Number If set this number w
193. he value may not contain spaces SIPREGISTRAR Null SIP Registrar IP Addresses Valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS name format separated by commas without any intervening spaces 0 to 255 ASCII characters including commas Null is a valid value but the value may not contain spaces SNMPADD Null For pre Release 2 8 only Text string containing 1 or more allowable source IP Addresses for SNMP queries in dotted decimal or DNS format separated by commas with up to 127 total ASCII characters The Null default means that SNMP is disabled Release 2 6 does not support SNMP unless SNMPADD is set to a non null value When non null the telephone accepts only SNMP queries from the IP Addresses in this parameter See the note under SNMPSTRING For Release 2 8 Text string can contain 0 or more allowable source IP Addresses For Release 2 8 and above CM 3 1 3 and above supports downloading of SNMPADD upon registration 10 of 12 Issue 7 October 2007 107 Server Administration Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range SNMPSTRING Null For pre Release 2 8 only Text string containing the SNMP community string 0 to 32 ASCII characters The Null default means that SNMP is disabled Release 2 6 does not support SNMP unless SNMPSTRING is set to a non null value For Release 2 8
194. he value of name is a case insensitive equivalent to string If no such name exists the entire conditional is ignored e SET commands of the form SET parameter_name value Invalid values cause the specified value to be ignored for the associated parameter_name so the default or previously administered value is retained All values must be text strings even if the value itself is numeric a dotted decimal IP Address etc Note Enclose all data in quotation marks for proper interpretation Issue 7 October 2007 77 Server Administration The Avaya provided upgrade script file includes lines that tell the telephone to GET 46xxsettings scr and 46xxsettings txt These lines cause the telephone to use TFTP HTTP to attempt to download the file specified in the GET commana If the file is obtained its contents are interpreted as an additional script file That is how your settings are changed from the default settings If the file cannot be obtained the telephone continues processing the upgrade script file The upgrade script file is processed so that if there is no 46xxsettings scr file the telephone looks for a 46xxsettings txt file If the settings file is successfully obtained but does not include any setting changes the telephone stops using TFTP or HTTP This happens when you initially download the script file template from the Avaya support Web site before you make any changes When the settings file contains no setting changes the telephone
195. hones Issue 7 October 2007 151 Avaya 46xx IP Telephone MIB 152 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Appendix B Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Introduction This appendix describes the capabilities and limitations of the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone s Web Browser We also provide suggestions to help you design Web sites for viewing on the 4630 4630SW This appendix is intended for 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Web Browser Web page designers and assumes readers are familiar with HTML Style Sheets and ECMAScript This appendix serves two primary functions e To present technologies implemented in the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone s Web Access application including any limitations or non standard implementations and e To provide a suggested model for developing effective Web pages for Web browser viewing This appendix is not intended to provide technical details on setting up a Web server nor does it provide information on Web server technologies Finally this document is not intended to provide an introduction to Web browser protocols or technologies Note See the Avaya Web site for a link to sites where HTML templates are available for customizing Any subsequent reference to the 4630 IP Telephone in this appendix applies equally to the 4630SW IP Telephone Issue 7 October 2007 153 Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone General Background The 4630 IP Telephone display is
196. hosted site To enable access to this site remove the from the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDLEUR lines To change the web site that your phones point to replace the provided URL in the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDELURI lines with the URL of your site SET WMLHOME http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4625 home wml SET WMLIDLEURI http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4625 idle wml GOTO END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 4625 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH FREER HEA AEE HE EAE EE AE EE A A A EE A A eitinn Issue 7 October 2007 227 Sample Upgrade Script File SETTINGS4630 Pe ciaraeeiRiRiEIia aie RIRIRiAIRITIAIETRIRIRIRTRIRITIAIEIRRIAIEIRIRIAIRIRIRIRIMIRIIRIRIRITGRERIRIRITIATRIEGRIRI ETD HHHHH Settings for the 4630 IP Phone LDAP Application These settings are used to enable and administer the LDAP application on the 4630 Your LDAP Directory server Address You must set this value to a non null value to enable the LDAP application The default is null but valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS format separated by commas without intervening spaces to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters SET DIRSRVR Idap mycompany com The TCP port number of your LDAP Directory Server The default port number is 389 If you wish to change the port number you must set this value SET
197. hould come up with a different model for presenting the data possibly using lists and divisions Lists J e e e Tables lt ol gt starts an ordered list Provides a list with some type of numbering upper case letters lower case letters digits upper case roman numerals lower case roman numerals Setting the type attribute is ignored in the browser lt ul gt starts an unordered list Provides a list with bullets to the left of each item lt li gt adds an item to an ordered or unordered list lt dl gt starts a definition list Provides a list with two fields per list item The first is a term and the second is the term s definition lt dt gt adds a new definition term to a definition list lt dd gt adds a new term definition to a definition list The new HTML 4 0 table tags lt thead gt lt tbody gt and lt tfoot gt are all implemented These tags allow printed pages to have headers and footers when the table is longer than a single page Since the 4630 IP Telephone Web Browser has no print capability we recommend that these tags not be used lt table gt starts a table layout lt caption gt adds a caption to a table The align attribute allows a caption to be placed above or below the table This attribute has no effect in the telephone lt tr gt adds a new table row to a table lt th gt adds a header for some column s of a table lt td gt adds a piece of data for some row s and column s of a table
198. ication can communicate with that database IP telephone users can then use their phones to search for names telephone numbers or other information Using search results users can call a person directly store a number on a Speed Dial button and view more details about the person The Thin Client Directory application applies only to these IP telephone types e 4610SW e 4620 4620SW e 4621SW e 4622SW e 4625SW See the 4600 Series IP Telephones Application Programmer Interface API Guide available on the Avaya support Web site http Awww avaya com support for detailed information about installing and administering Avaya s Thin Client Directory application Issue 7 October 2007 171 Administering Thin Client Directories 172 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Appendix E The Push Feature Introduction Release 2 1 of the 4600 Series IP Telephones provided support for a feature called Push which applies to the 4610SW 4620 and 4620SW Telephones Release 2 2 introduced additional IP Telephones the 4621SW the 4622SW and the 4625SW to which the Push feature also applies In all cases the Push feature applies only to telephones supporting H 323 and not to SIP IP telephones Push gives the System Administrator the capability to use WML protocol to e send content to a telephone without first receiving a user request and e potentially override what the user is otherwise experiencing You can send pushed co
199. ide Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range FTPUSERSTAT 1 Administered user permissions for FTP backup restore files Controls whether the user may specify an FTP server IP Address and or directory path for backing up and restoring user data Valid values are 1 User can specify server and directory path 2 User can specify directory path only 0 User must use the server and directory path administered If the telephone is supposed to restore retrieve data with HTTP as indicated by the system value of BRURI the system value of RESTORESTAT and not FTPUSERSTAT is the only relevant permission to backup restore This is because HTTP is invoked when BRURI is non null and if the operation fails FTP is not attempted GMTOFFSET 0 00 Standard Time Offset from Greenwich Mean Time for SIP telephones Valid values are a positive or negative number of hours and minutes less than 13 hours 1 to 6 ASCII characters optionally beginning with or followed by one or two ASCII numeric digits whose combined value is from 0 to 12 optionally followed by a and two ASCII numeric digits whose combined value is from 00 to 59 HEADSYS 1 Headset operational mode One ASCII numeric digit Valid values are 0 or 2 General Operation where a disconnect messages returns the telephone to
200. idth a horizontal scrollbar is added This now takes up some of the browser s height and fewer lines of text are displayed Given the small size of the browser it is highly desirable to avoid causing scrollbars to appear Unless the amount of text shown in a page is kept to a bare minimum avoiding a vertical scrollbar is unlikely However avoiding fixed width objects or ensuring that the size of fixed width is kept small gains some viewable space If scrolling is a requirement vertical scrolling is usually better perceived by users than horizontal scrolling Images Using images in a Web page is always a concern For example a page with many images can slow up downloading While this is still a concern in the telephone an image s size has a much greater effect Browser and telephone memory is limited Each image can use a sizable amount of memory overwhelming the browser Use an image only if it is essential to a page Images also fall into the realm of fixed width objects Check all images to verify that they do not cause a horizontal scrollbar to be added Scale down a browser image by setting the width and height attributes of the lt img gt tag Or instead scale the images when setting up the Web site Scaling images during Web site setup avoids forcing the browser to deal with the sizing Using the width and height attributes scales the image after it is downloaded by the browser Scaling Issue 7 October 2007 163 Creating
201. ignaling INVITE BYE e Control signaling SUBSCRIBE NOTIFY SIP also supports RTP and RTCP using the Session Description Protocol A telephone is loaded with either H 323 or SIP software as part of its initial script file administration and initialization Software As shipped from the factory the 4600 Series IP Telephones may not contain the latest software When the telephone is first plugged in a software download from a TFTP or HTTP server starts to give the telephone its proper functionality For downloads of H 323 software upgrades the PBX provides the capability for a remote restart of the 4600 Series IP Telephone As a consequence of restarting the telephone automatically restarts reboot procedures If new software is available on the server the telephone downloads it as part of the reboot process A 4602 4602SW 4602SW 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW or 4625SW IP Telephone can support either H 323 or SIP software but not both at the same time All telephones come from the factory with H 323 software by default You can convert a telephone from H 323 to SIP or from SIP to H 323 by administering your server and settings file For more information see Converting Software on Avaya 4600 Series IP Telephones in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide Document Number 555 233 128 DHCP and File Servers The DHCP server provides the following information to the 4600 Series IP Telephone e IP Address of the 4600 Se
202. ill be the top leftmost speed dial button in Group 1 of the 4630 speed dial screen and labeled EMERGENCY The default is null but any valid phone number is acceptable SET PHNEMERGNUM 911 HHH AHHH HH HAH HAHH 4630 Stock Ticker HHHHHHHHH AHHH HH Use this setting to activate the stock ticker on your 4630 Go to Options on your 4630 to complete setup of this feature Use 0 to Disable or 1 to Enable the default SET STKSTAT 1 GOTO END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 4630 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH ERE EERE EAE ERE AEE EE AE EE A A a SETTINGS9610 ERE AERE EAE EAE EAE AEE EAE EEA EE A A H This section contains the phone model specific settings for the 9610 telephone H HHHHHHHHHH HHA HHH AUDIO SETTINGS HHHHHHAHHHHAHH H Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the handset H setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 one level softer than NORMAL 2 two levels softer than NORMAL 3 three levels softer than NORMAL 4 OFF inaudible 5 one level louder than NORMAL 230 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction SET AUDIOSTHS 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH WML BROWSER SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH The WMLSMALL setting is used to enable and administer the Web Application NOTES The model 9610 is different from other 96xx phone models and does no
203. illiseconds off until either the or button is pressed CAUSE The PBX has rejected registration for an unspecified reason RESOLUTION Press to retry the process using the same values or to restart and re enter the extension and password Consult your Avaya Media Server administration and troubleshooting documentation Wrong Set VISUAL INDICATION Message Waiting indicators at top of telephone and Type left middle of faceplate display a broken flutter continuously alternating 50 milliseconds on 50 milliseconds off for 500 milliseconds followed by 500 milliseconds off until either the or button is pressed CAUSE The PBX does not recognize the set type RESOLUTION Ensure the PBX is properly administered to expect the appropriate telephone for the IP Address and extension Press to retry the process using the same values or to restart and re enter the extension and password 2 of 2 Issue 7 October 2007 149 Troubleshooting Guidelines 150 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Appendix A Avaya 46xx IP Telephone MIB Downloading the Avaya 46xx IP Telephone MIB The custom Management Information Base MIB is available in txt format for free download at http www avaya com support Type 46xx MIB in the search box and press Enter Note All 4600 Series IP Telephones of a given Release have the same MIB regardless of whether they are SIP or H 323 telep
204. in minutes before the WMLIDLEURI web page is displayed Valid values are 1 to 999 Default if WMLIDLEURI is set is 10 minutes SET WMLIDLETIME 100 H H HHHHHHHHHHHHHAHH PUSH INTERFACE SETTINGS HHHHHHHHH H These settings are used to administer the Push interface H The list of all the Trusted Push Servers If setto all servers are allowed If set to null or blank Push is disabled SET TPSLIST 135 20 21 20 H The list of all the Subscription Servers SET SUBSCRIBELIST http 135 20 21 21 subscribe H H HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH RTCP MONITORING HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH H The RTCP monitor One RTCP monitor VMM server IP Address in dotted decimal format or DNS name format 0 to 15 characters Note that for H 323 telephones only this parameter may be changed via signaling from Avaya Communication Manager SET RTCPMON 192 168 0 10 H RTCPMONPORT sets the port used to send RTCP information to the IP Address specified in the RTCPMON parameter RTCPMONPORT is only supported on SIP telephones The default is 5005 H SET RTCPMONPORT 5005 H 182 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction HHHHHHHHHHH CONVERGED NETWORK ANALYZER SETTINGS H The CNA server One or more CNA server IP Addresses in dotted decimal format or DNS name format 0 to 255 characters SET CNASRVR 192 168 0 10 H
205. ings for the 4610 telephone H HHHHHHHHHH HHA HHH AUDIO SETTINGS HHHHHHHAHHHHAHH H Headset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the headset H setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL HH 7 six levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL 9 two levels louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHD 0 Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the handset setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 three levels softer than NORMAL H 2 OFF inaudible 3 one level softer than NORMAL H 4 two levels softer than NORMAL 220 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction 5 four levels softer than NORMAL 6 five levels softer than NORMAL H 7 six levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL 9 two levels louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHS 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE WML BROWSER SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH The WMLHOME setting is used to enable and administer the Web Application The WMLIDLEURI setting acts as an idle screen when the phone has been idle see WMLIDLETIME value By default this URL is NULL and this screen is not activated HH
206. inistrators Guide for more details Some of the parameters listed below have default settings which are used by the IP Telephones even if they are commented out in this file For a list of those settings and their default values see the LAN Administrators Guide PETER PEER TATE ETE ET THEE EEE ATE A ETE TET a FEA EE HEA AEE HE EEE HE AE AEE AE AE A EE EE A A A A AE HH COMMON SETTINGS Applies to all telephones HH HH ETEBE PETE TERE ETE TEE TEEPE ATE A ETE TEE HHHHHHHHHHHHHAHHHHE HTTP SERVER SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHHHH HTTP Server Addresses If you set your HTTP Server Addresses via DHCP do not set them here as they will over ride your DHCP settings Also use TLSSRVR instead if you require an authenticated server Server used to down load configuration script files Zero or more HTTP server IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS name format separated by commas without any intervening spaces 0 to 255 ASCII characters including commas SET HTTPSRVR 192 168 0 5 HTTP Server Directory Path Specifies the path name to prepend to all file names used in HTTP and HTTPS GET operations during startup 0 to 127 ASCII characters no spaces SET HTTPDIR myhttpdir HTTP port Sets the TCP port used for HTTP file downloads from 176 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction non Avaya servers
207. ion Initial Configuration If it is not listed then install the DHCP server Initial Configuration The Windows NT 4 0 DHCP server configuration involves setting up a scope for the IP telephone A DHCP scope is essentially a grouping of IP devices in this case IP telephones running the DHCP client service in a subnet The scope defines parameters for each subnet Each scope has the following properties e A unique subnet mask used to determine the subnet related to a given IP Address e Ascope name assigned by the administrator when the scope is created e Lease duration values to be assigned to DHCP clients with dynamic addresses In addition the DHCP server can assign configuration parameters to a client and these can be specified for each DHCP scope Setting up the Windows NT 4 0 DHCP server requires the following steps 1 Creating a DHCP scope for the IP telephones 2 Editing custom options 3 Adding the DHCP options 4 Activating the new scope 5 Verifying your configuration Each step is detailed in the next five sub sections Issue 7 October 2007 63 Server Administration Creating a DHCP Scope for the IP Telephones Use the following procedure to create a DHCP scope for the IP telephones 1 Select Start gt Programs gt Admin Tools gt DHCP Manager 2 Expand Local Machine in the DHCP Servers window by double clicking it until the sign changes to a sign 3 Select Scope gt Create 4 Define the
208. irtual LAN VLAN environment If your LAN environment does not include VLANs set the system parameter L2Q to 2 off to ensure correct operation VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1Q tagging VLAN is a useful method of managing VoIP traffic in your LAN Avaya recommends that you establish a voice VLAN set L2QVLAN to that VLAN and provide voice traffic with priority over other traffic lf LLDP was used set the telephones VLAN that setting has absolute authority Otherwise you can set VLAN tagging manually by DHCP or in the 46xxsettings txt file If VLAN tagging is enabled L2Q 0 or 1 the 4600 Series IP Telephones set the VLAN ID to L2QVLAN and VLAN priority for packets from the telephone to L2EQAUD for audio packets and L2QSIG for signalling packets The default value 6 for these parameters is the recommended value for voice traffic in IEEE 802 1D Regardless of the tagging setting a 4600 Series IP Telephone will always transmit packets from the telephone at absolute priority over packets from secondary Ethernet The priority settings are useful only if the downstream equipment is administered to give the voice VLAN priority VLAN Detection The Avaya IP Telephones support automatic detection of the condition where the L2QVLAN setting is incorrect When VLAN tagging is enabled L2Q 0 or 1 initially the 4600 Series IP Telephone transmits DHCP messages with IEEE 802 1Q tagging and the VLAN set to L2QVLAN The telephones will continue
209. is the file the FTP Server IP server to which backup data should be saved Verify that Address the FTPDIR value is the correct directory path for that file server The FTP Server has not CAUSE The FTP server has not responded to the attempt yet responded so backup to backup restore has not yet succeeded RESOLUTION Try again verify the FTP server address verify the FTP server is online and or verify the network connectivity 7 of 7 Table 17 Possible Error Messages During 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW and 4630 4630SW Backup Restore Error Message Cause Resolution The FTP Server has denied access Please check FTP Setup parameters The FTP Server was unable to store the backup file CAUSE The FTP server has reported that it did not store data RESOLUTION Verify the FTP server setup parameters as indicated on the FTP Setup Parameters screen See FTP Setup in Chapter 8 of the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone User Guide or see Backup Restore Options in Chapter 6 of the appropriate User Guide for the telephone type CAUSE The FTP server has reported that it could not store the data RESOLUTION Verify administration and available capacity filespace on the FTP server Troubleshooting the 4601 IP Telephone This section describes specific problems that can occur during 4601 IP Telephone installation administration or normal operation and possible ways of resolving these probl
210. iver that information to the telephone where appropriate Recommendations and specifications for alternatives to certain parameters are also provided The parameters under which the telephone needs to operate are summarized as follows Telephone Administration on the call server The call server for H 323 is the Avaya Media Server while the call server for SIP is the Registration Server IP Address management for the telephone Tagging Control and VLAN administration for the telephone if appropriate Quality of Service QoS administration for the telephone if appropriate Site specific Option Number SSON setting of DHCP servers if appropriate Protocol administration for example Simple Network Management Control SNMP and Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Interface administration for the telephone if appropriate Application specific telephone administration if appropriate For example Directory or Web specific information required for these optional applications The delivery mechanisms are Maintaining the information on the call server Manually entering the information using the telephone dialpad Administering the DHCP server Editing the settings file on the applicable TFTP or HTTP file server These parameters can be administered in a variety of ways as indicated in Table 2 Note that not all parameters can be administered on all delivery mechanisms Issue 7 October 2007 51 Server Administration T
211. k Reference Issue 2 July 2002 555 236 700 This document contains important safety and installation information for the 30A Switched Hub 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide 555 233 128 This document describes how to install 4600 Series IP Telephones It also provides troubleshooting guidelines for the 4600 Series IP Telephones 4600 Series IP Telephones Application Programmer Interface API Guide 16 300256 This document provides information on developing Web applications for 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones This document also covers Push feature administration 4601 IP Telephone User Guide 16 300043 This document provides detailed information about using the 4601 and 4601 IP Telephone 4602 4602SW IP Telephone User Guide 555 233 780 This document provides detailed information about using the 4602 4602SW 4602SW IP Telephone 4602 4602SW SIP IP Telephone User Guide 16 300470 This document provides detailed information about using the 4602 4602SW SIP IP Telephone 4606 IP Telephone User Guide 555 233 775 This document provides detailed information about using the 4606 IP Telephone Issue 7 October 2007 19 Introduction 4610SW IP Telephone User Guide 555 233 784 This document provides detailed information about using the 4610SW IP Telephone 4610SW SIP IP Telephone User Guide 16 300472 This document provides detailed information about using the 4610SW SIP IP Tel
212. ks However each Release has increasing checks and protections to resist such attacks while maintaining appropriate service to legitimate users All 4600 Series IP Telephones that have WML Web applications and run R2 2 or greater software support Transport Layer Security TLS This standard allows the telephone to establish a secure connection to a HTTPS server in which the telephone s upgrade and settings file can reside This setup adds security over the TFTP alternative You also have a variety of optional capabilities to restrict or remove how crucial network information is displayed or used These capabilities are covered in more detail in Chapter 4 Server Administration and include e As of Release 2 8 4600 Series IP Telephones use IP source address filtering to improve their resiliency to denial of service attacks when only services that require messages from known IP Addresses are enabled i e when ICMPDU is 0 where RTCPMON is null when CNASRVR is null when CTISTAT is 0 and when SNMPSTRING is null or when SNMPSTRING and SNMPADDR are both non null Additional IP source addresses can be explicitly excluded from filtering if necessary through use of the FILTERLIST parameter which is also new in Release 2 8 e As of Release 2 8 4600 Series IP Telephones require that any DNS names used as values of TPSLIST be fully qualified to improve the security of the Push feature For more details on the Push feature Appendix E The P
213. l HTML pages would have an external style sheet reference another server side executable This executable dynamically 164 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Design Guidelines generates font information based on the cookie form component or configuration value relative to the IP Address of the telephone Using a static external style sheet makes page development and testing much easier since it appears the same way to both the designer and the reader Allowing the user to choose a font size forces more work on the designer to verify that all fixed size items appear acceptably Maintaining Context Given the small screen area a user can become easily lost Headings are often not in view and the user if distracted by other work can lose a sense of context Style sheets can help maintain this sense of context through color The lt div gt and lt span gt tags are intended to provide page designer defined content based style By defining classes of lt div gt tags with various colors and border styles the designer provides additional information However a significant number of people suffer from some form of color blindness Thus it may be necessary to design pages both with and without using color styles User Interaction As these design guidelines indicate HTML forms work reasonably well in the Browser However due to telephone limitations as an input device keyboard input can be difficult A complete keyboar
214. l coding result ina deterioration in the voice quality Avoid tandem coding wherever possible in any compressed voice system for example by minimizing analog trunking on the PBX Voice Coding Standards There are several voice coding standards Avaya 4600 Series IP Telephones offer these options e G 711 which describes the 64 kbps PCM voice coding technique G 711 encoded voice is already in the correct format for digital voice delivery in the public telephone network or through PBXs e G726 ADPCM at 32Kbps e G729A and G 729B both of which describe adaptive code excited linear predictive CELP compression that allows voice to be coded into 8 kbps streams Telephony Protocols There are two major protocols used for Voice over IP VoIP signaling Session Initiation Protocol SIP and H 323 The two protocols provide connection control and call progress signaling but in very different ways These protocols can be used simultaneously over the same network but in general no endpoint supports both protocols at the same time Neither protocol is necessarily superior but each offers some unique advantages SIP telephones for example do not require centralized call servers and can route telephone calls when a URL identifies the destination H 323 telephones leverage the call server s presence into the potential availability of hundreds of telephone related features that a standalone SIP telephone cannot provide DHCP Dyna
215. l for the database field containing telephone numbers The default is the standard LDAP value DIRSRCHTIME 0 Optional Text string for an integer number of seconds This is the maximum duration the LDAP directory spends searching before reporting completion or failure of the search The default is LDAP standard for unlimited duration DIRLDAPPORT 389 Optional Directory LDAP Port The port that exchanges LDAP messages with the server Stock Ticker Application Parameters STKSTAT 1 Optional Text string identifying whether the phones are allowed to have the Stock Ticker Application 1 is the default and 0 disables the Stock Ticker Application 1 of 2 114 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Customizing the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Table 11 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters by Application continued Parameter Name Default Value Status Description and Value Range Voice Mail Application Parameters VMLHOME Null Mandatory Text string containing the URL of the home page for the Voice Mail Application Web Access Application Parameters WEBHOME Null Mandatory Text string containing the URL of the home page for the Web Access application WEBPROXY Null Optional Text string containing the IP Address in dotted decimal or DNS format of an HTTP proxy server This parameter is optional if the all the Web pages the user accesses are on your organization
216. lable RESOLUTION The telephone was attempting to access a network resource DHCP server TFTP server or the Avaya Media Server and was not successful Check the resource being called upon for its availability If the resource appears operational and properly linked to the network verify addressing is accurate and a communication path exists in both directions between the telephone and the resource CAUSE The Avaya Media Server has an unspecified problem RESOLUTION Consult your Avaya Media Server administration and troubleshooting documentation 2 of 7 142 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Error Messages Table 16 Possible Error Messages During Installation or Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Error Message Cause Resolution During Registration Bad Router CAUSE The telephone cannot find a router based on the information in the DHCP file for GIPADD RESOLUTION Change administration on DHCP as indicated in DHCP in Chapter 4 Server Administration Connecting CAUSE The telephone and the H 323 call server have agreed to carry out the Time to Service TTS feature and the user has indicated a need to communicate with the call server e g by going off hook or by pressing a feature button when the telephone does not have a TCP connection to the call server This typically occurs during a brief interval after completion of registration or as a result of a network outage that
217. le sometimes called merely the script file from http www avaya com support This file allows the telephone to use default settings for customer definable options Of course these settings can also be changed with DHCP or in some cases from the telephone s dialpad itself However you might want to open the default file and administer the options to add useful functionality to your Avaya IP Telephones This file must reside in the same directory as the upgrade script file and must be called 46xxsettings scr or 46xxsettings txt The Avaya IP Telephones can operate without this file Note Most Windows systems interpret the file extension scr as a screen saver The 4600 IP Telephones originally used scr to indicate a script file Starting with Release 1 7 the settings file can also have the extension txt The settings file can include any of the five types of statements one per line e Comments which are statements with a character in the first column e Tags which are comments that have exactly one space character after the initial followed by a text string with no spaces e Goto commands of the form GOTO tag Goto commands cause the telephone to continue interpreting the settings file at the next line after a tag statement If no such statement exists the rest of the settings file is ignored e Conditionals of the form IF name SEQ string GOTO tag Conditionals cause the Goto command to be processed if t
218. le CAUSE Improper headset adapter RESOLUTION Replace adapter with Avaya s M12LU CM or M12LUCM headset adapter or the 3412 HIC Adapter Cable We recommend the M12LU CM or M12LUCM since they supports Automatic Gain Control Possible CAUSE Room acoustics RESOLUTION Ensure that there are six inches or so of blank space to the right of the telephone If that is insufficient use the handset Possible CAUSE Jitter delay dropped packets etc RESOLUTION One or more Quality of Service QoS features should be implemented in the network See Chapter 3 of the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide Possible CAUSE Improper non Category 5 wiring RESOLUTION Replace non Category 5 wiring with Category 5 wiring CAUSE The Ringer Off RngOF softkey feature has been activated RESOLUTION Use the softkey Menu option to access the RngOF feature A downward pointing triangle means the Ringer is off Ensure that the triangle points up Also check the Volume setting on the telephone Finally do a self test on the telephone 3 of 6 128 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Error Conditions Table 14 Some Error Conditions in Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Condition Cause Resolution The telephone works properly except for the Speaker The telephone works properly except incoming DTMF tones are not received The telephone works properly except sidetone DTMF is not hea
219. le Servers 0 ee ee eee ee ee ee Sohware Checklist sos amp oie ee eS oS BGS hee OSS DSSS ae OS SSS Choosing a DHCP Configuration 0 00 eee eee ees DHCP Software Alternatives 0 2 ee es DHCP Genetic Setup lt c ke eb dS Kee DRE DEERE OT DO OO SX Windows NT 4 0 DHCP Server 0 2 eee es Verifying the Installation of the DHCP Server 245 Initial Configuration 2c ese ese b eee eee weed e ween ss Creating a DHCP Scope forthe IP Telephones 4 5 4 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide 34 34 34 34 34 35 35 36 36 42 42 43 44 47 47 47 49 50 51 51 54 54 55 55 55 56 56 56 58 58 58 59 63 63 63 64 Contents Editing Custom Options 2 2 ee ee es 65 Adding the DHCP Option 2 2 eee ee 66 Activating the Leases 1 2 ee ee 66 Verifying Your Configuration 2 2 ee 66 Windows 2000 DHCP Server 2 2 2 ee eee eee es 67 Verifying the Installation of the DHCP Server 25 5 67 Adding DHCP Options 2 aa 70 Activating the New Scope 22 ee eee ee ee ee 71 Beir here OR fi ct oct eee ee eee oe Chere ose s SHS wEeSe 71 TFTP Generic Setup cacra ean eee see eee ee a na ewe Ss 72 TFTP Server on S8300 Media Server 2 2 ee eee ee es 72 Avaya File Server Application 2 0 0 ee eee eee ee ee 72 HATIP ee er er ee ee ee ee ee 73 HTTP Generic Setup ccc bi ee ede eNO SES eH TOE ROSS 73
220. led or the telephone does not know either way Packet Loss No data or a decimal percentage Late and out of sequence packets are counted as lost if they are discarded Packets are not counted as lost until a subsequent packet is received and the loss confirmed by the RTP sequence number Packetization Delay No data or an integer number of milliseconds The number reflects the amount of delay in received audio packets and includes any look ahead delay associated with the codec One way Network No data or an integer number of milliseconds The number is one half Delay the value RTCP computes for the round trip delay Network Jitter No data or an integer number of milliseconds reporting the average Compensation Delay delay introduced by the telephone s jitter buffer For 4602 4602SW 4602SW IP Telephones the Network Audio Quality Screen gives the user a qualitative assessment of the current overall audio quality This assessment is based on separate evaluations of e the Packet Loss and e the total Network Delay which is the sum of Packetization Delay One way Network Delay and Network Jitter Compensation Delay and e consideration of the codec in use This information s implication for LAN administration depends of course on the values the user reports and the specific nature of your LAN like topology loading QoS administration etc This information s major use is to give the user an idea of how network conditions affe
221. lephone HH First Language File Name Contains the name of the first language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt HH Note It is recommended you install the latest version of the language files in all 96xx H 323 telephones even if some phones are running an earlier release of software HH SET LANG1FILE mlf_s12_v10_russian txt HH Second Language File Name Contains the name of the second language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG2FILE mif_s12_v10_spanish txt Third Language File Name Contains the name of the third language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSFILE mlf_s12_v10_french_paris txt Fourth Language File Name Contains the name of the fourth language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG4FILE mif_s12_v10_german txt System Wide Language Contains the name of the default system language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSYS mlf_s12_v10_german txt GOTO END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 9610 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH FHHHHHHHHHAHH HH HAH AH AHH A j SETTINGS9620 AEE AE A A E A T le This section contains the phone model specific settings 232 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction for the 9620 telephone HH HHHHHHHHHH HAHAH CERTIFICATE
222. line followed by dial tone followed by at least one digit typical instance of Automatic Route Selection ARS for US access to international numbers of unknown and variable length Table 10 provides definitions and valid values for each SIP dial plan parameter Customizing the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone The 4630 4630SW IP Telephone has some unique and powerful capabilities that take advantage of its large display and access to LAN facilities If your LAN has an LDAP compliant directory or if you have a corporate Web site suitable for the 4630 s 4630SW s 1 4 VGA display the telephone needs key information about the servers providing those facilities Specifically to administer the 4630 4630SW Telephone for the LDAP Directory application or the Web Access application you must provide the information Table 11 calls for You must provide this information in a customized script file in accordance with 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files on page 76 CAUTION For the 4630 4630SW to work properly you must have a 46xxsettings scr or 46xxsettings txt file in the same directory as the 4630 4630SW application file If you do not edit the 46xxsettings file the 4630 4630SW uses default settings only The 46xxsettings file is no longer part of the zip file on the Avaya software download Web site but is available as a stand alone download If you already have such a file because you downloaded it for a previous 46
223. lusion Range enter the last IP Address in the range you want to exclude c Click the Add button d Repeat steps a through c for each IP Address range that you want to exclude 68 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide 15 16 DHCP Note You can add additional exclusion ranges later by right clicking the Address Pool under the newly created scope and selecting the New Exclusion Range option Example Suppose the ranges of IP Addresses available for your IP telephone network are e 135 254 76 7 to 135 254 76 80 e 135 254 76 90 to 135 254 76 200 e 135 254 76 225 to 135 254 76 230 The Start IP Address and End IP Address you enter in the IP Address Range dialog box are 135 254 76 7 and 135 254 76 230 respectively In the Add Exclusions dialog box exclude the following ranges e 135 254 76 81 to 135 254 76 89 e 135 254 76 201 to 135 254 76 224 Click the Next button after you enter all the exclusions The Lease Duration dialog box displays For all telephones that obtain their IP Addresses from the server enter 30 days in the Lease Duration field This is the duration after which a device s IP Address expires and which the device needs to renew Click the Next button The Configure DHCP Options dialog box displays Click the No I will activate this scope later button The Router Default Gateway dialog box displays For each router or default gateway enter the IP Address and click the A
224. ly administered ahead of time This description can help you understand how the 4600 Series IP Telephones relate to the routers and servers in your network Step 1 Telephone to Network The telephone is appropriately installed and powered After a short initialization process the telephone identifies the LAN speed If applicable to your network and telephone model 802 1X Supplicant authentication occurs at this time where an 802 1X ID and password have to be submitted to proceed Then the telephone sends a DHCP message out into the network identifying itself and requesting further information Depending on your network structure the message goes directly to the DHCP server or a network router receives the message and relays it to the appropriate DHCP server 34 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Initialization Process Step 2 DHCP Server to Telephone The DHCP file server provides information to the telephone as described in DHCP and File Servers on page 56 Among other data passed to the telephone is the IP Address of the TFTP or HTTP server which is crucial for the next step Step 3 Telephone and File Server Many 4600 Series IP Telephones can download script files application files and settings files from either a TFTP HTTP or HTTPS server For specific telephone server compatibility see Table 1 If you have a mixture of telephones you can use either e TFTP servers only e Both TFTP and HTTP serv
225. m Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range RESTORESTAT 1 FTP backup restore file status If the telephone supports backup restore and this value is set to 1 and system value FTPSRVR is non null automatic backup and restore proceeds upon completion of telephone registration If set to 0 automatic backup restore does not occur upon registration and must be initiated by the user RTCPMON Null Text string containing the 4 octet IP Address of the RTCP monitor currently in use RTCPMONPORT 5005 The port used to send RTCP information to the IP Address specified in the RTCPMON parameter SIPDOMAIN Null SIP Domain Name Valid values are 0 to 255 ASCII characters Null is a valid value but the value may not contain spaces The domain name used in the Contact header for SIP registration For example if the SIP domain is avaya com the Contact header sent to the SIP registrar for extension 1234 would be sip 1234 avaya com SIPPROXYSRVR Null SIP Proxy Server IP Addresses Valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS name format separated by commas without any intervening spaces 0 to 255 ASCII characters including commas Null is a valid value but the value may not contain spaces SIPPORT 5060 SIP Server Port Number Valid values are 1 to 5 ASCII numeric characters from 0 to 65535 Null is nota valid value and t
226. m the Avaya support Web site 72 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide HTTP HTTP This section gives general guidance to set up an HTTP server for downloading software updates to 4600 Series IP Telephones CAUTION The files defined by HTTP server configuration must be accessible from all IP telephones invoking those files Ensure that the file names match the names in the upgrade script including case since UNIX systems are case sensitive Note Use any HTTP application you want In addition to the HTTP application on the Avaya S8300 Media Server other commonly used HTTP applications include Apache and Microsoft IIS HTTP Generic Setup These are the phases involved in setting up an HTTP server e Install the HTTP server application e Administer the system parameter HTTPSRVR to the address es of the HTTP server Include this parameter in DHCP Option 176 or the appropriate SSON Option e Download the upgrade script file and application file s from the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support to the HTTP server Note Many LINUX servers distinguish between upper and lower case names Ensure that you specify the 46xxsettings filename accurately as well as the names and values of the data within the file If you choose to enhance the security of your HTTP environment by using Transport Layer Security TLS you also need to e Install the TLS server application e Administer the system paramet
227. many cases the ports used are the ones called for by IETF or other standards bodies Many of the diagrams explanations refer to system parameters or options settings for example IRSTAT or DIRSRVR See Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones in Chapter 4 Server Administration for more information on parameters and settings Note Figure 1 Signaling Audio and Management Diagram on page 38 requires a modification for H 323 signaling for phones working with CM 4 0 and above and 4600 Release 2 8 and above software as part of the Time to Service TTS feature as follows Modification 4600 Series IP Telephone lt _ gt H 323 Gatekeeper Port 1720 gm H 323 Signaling TCP IP p Port 61440 61444 source port range defined on the in network region form Issue 7 October 2007 37 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols Figure 1 Signaling Audio and Management Diagram Signaling Audio and Management 4600 Series IP Telephone Default is 49300 randomly selected only active during a call is enabled Port 161 Note SNMP is disabled by default Port any unused Jj Port original Source Port zi Port 50000 il Port original Source Port wl Port 1500 6500 J if RTCP monitoring Jj E gt Port 49300 49309 E lt H 323 RAS UDP IP i oe H 323 Signaling TCP IP gt Port 5060
228. means of the DHCP or TFTP HTTP servers In all cases you are setting a system parameter in the telephone to a desired value Table 10 lists the parameter names their default values the valid ranges for those values and a description of each one For DHCP the DHCP Option sets these parameters to the desired values as discussed in DHCP Generic Setup on page 59 For TFTP and HTTP the parameters in Table 10 are set to desired values in the Script File as discussed in Contents of the Upgrade Script on page 80 Avaya recommends that you administer options on the 4600 Series IP Telephones using script files Some DHCP applications have limits on the amount of user specified information The administration required can exceed those limits for example for a 4630 with all applications administered You might choose to completely disable the capability to enter or change option settings from the dialpad as of Release 1 8 As of that Release a new system value PROCPSWD can be set as part of standard DHCP TFTP administration If PROCPSWD is non null and consists of 1 to 7 digits the user cannot invoke any dialpad options without first pressing Mute or Hold and entering the PROCPSWD value See Chapter 3 of the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide for more information CAUTION PROCPSWD is likely stored on the server in the clear and is certainly sent to the telephone in the clear Therefore do not consider PROCPSWD a
229. mes to offer voice packets a larger or prioritized share of network resources These schemes include standards such as e IEEE s 802 1D and 802 1Q e the Internet Engineering Task Force s IETF s Differentiated Services e RTP Control Protocol RTCP e Resource ReSerVation Protocol RSVP and e port based priority schemes such as UDP port selection Documentation for your LAN equipment details the extent to which your network can support any or all of these initiatives See Server Administration on page 51 for some implications of QoS for the 4600 Series IP Telephones As of Release 1 7 the 4620 4630 and 4630SW IP Telephones provided network audio quality information to the end user This network audio quality information might be useful to the LAN Administrator As of Release 1 8 all 4600 Series IP Telephones provide some level of detail about network audio quality For specific information see Network Audio Quality Display on 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 85 Issue 7 October 2007 29 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a family of standards based protocols and procedures to allow vendor independent data network management Using a simple set of protocol commands an SNMP compliant device stores information in standard format in one or more Management Information Bases MIBs Usually devices support the standards specific MIB termed MIB
230. mic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP allows a server to assign IP Addresses and other parameters to devices like the 4600 Series IP Telephones on an as needed basis DHCP eliminates the need to configure each end station with a static IP Address The DHCP application also passes information to the 4600 Series IP Telephone The DHCP application identifies the PBX and the file server s IP Addresses The application also identifies the paths to the upgrade script and the application file on the file server For further information see DHCP and File Servers on page 56 and DHCP on page 58 Issue 7 October 2007 27 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols TFTP The Avaya 4600 IP Telephones can get useful application information from the TFTP server The telephones also can upgrade themselves using files stored on the TFTP server After downloading software the Avaya 4600 Series IP Telephones can operate without a file server However some functionality can be lost if the file server is not available for a telephone reset For further information see e DHCP and File Servers on page 56 e TFTP H 323 Only on page 71 and e Table 1 File Servers and Compatible Telephone Software HTTP HTTP is potentially a more secure alternative to TFTP particularly when Transport Layer Security TLS is used to create HTTPS Secure HTTP You can store the same application software script file and settings file on an HTT
231. must enter the telephone s extension and the call server password For a restart of an existing installation this information is already stored on the telephone but the user may have to confirm the information The telephone and the call server exchange more messaging with the expected result being that the telephone is appropriately registered An exception to the requirement to enter an extension and password is for H 323 IP telephones running R2 3 and later software These telephones support a feature called Unnamed Registration Unnamed Registration allows a telephone to register with the Avaya Media Server without an extension assuming the Avaya Media Server also supports this feature To invoke Unnamed Registration take no action just let the Extension prompt display for 60 seconds without making an entry The telephone will automatically attempt to register by means of Unnamed Registration A telephone registered with Unnamed Registration has the following characteristics e only one call appearance e no administrable features e can make only outgoing calls subject to call server Class of Restriction Class of Service limitations and e can be converted to normal named registration by entering a valid extension and password More details about the installation process are available in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide and in Chapter 3 Requirements of this document TCP UDP Port Utilization Like most
232. nate the procedure without clearing the values Press the button to clear all values to their initial default values A confirmation tone sounds If the telephone already has an IP Address that was obtained through DHCP the telephone transmits a DHCPRELEASE message The following text displays left justified at the top of the display Clearing values The telephone is cleared to its out of the box state Issue 7 October 2007 133 Troubleshooting Guidelines The Reset Administrative Option As indicated in some troubleshooting procedures sometimes it is appropriate to reset the 4600 Series IP Telephone Procedures on how to do so are printed in this section You can also find reset procedures in Chapter 3 of the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide These parameters and settings are reset to default values including null as applicable when the Reset procedure finishes e Registration extension and password e All values administered by local procedures in accordance with Chapter 3 of the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide e All values previously downloaded using DHCP or from a TFTP settings file These values of course are usually restored when the telephone re registers after the reset Note If PROCSTAT was administered to 1 as described in Chapter 4 Server Administration you cannot invoke the R E S E T option In addition if PROCPSWD was administered as non null you must enter t
233. ndard protocol defined in STD 15 RFC 1157 developed to manage nodes on an IP network Simple Network Time Protocol An adaptation of the Network Time Protocol used to synchronize computer clocks in the internet An entity at one end of a point to point LAN segment that is being authenticated by an authenticator at the other end Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol a network layer protocol used on LANs and internets Trivial File Transfer Protocol used to provide downloading of upgrade scripts and application files to the IP telephones A new feature with Communication Manager 4 0 IP Endpoint Time to Service TTS decouples gatekeeper H 323 registration from TCP socket establishment for call signaling thus reducing the time for the endpoint to come into service Transport Layer Security an enhancement of Secure Sockets Layer SSL TLS is compatible with SSL 3 0 and allows for privacy and data integrity between two communicating applications Type Length Value elements transmitted and received as part of Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP User Datagram Protocol a connectionless transport layer protocol Registration with Avaya Communication Manager by an IP telephone with no extension Unnamed registration is typically used to limit incoming calls Virtual LAN Voice over IP a class of technology for sending audio data and signaling over LANs Wireless Markup Language used by any 4600 Series IP Telephones t
234. ne s screen size the browser has only a single font available for use Font weights such as normal and bold are supported Finer font values such as lighter and bolder are not supported Normal and Italic font styles are also supported Font sizes are also supported specified by either percentages or raw numbers However percentages below 50 all appear as the same size Although we found some problems with font specifications fonts behave reasonably well given the screen s size and resolution The only major problem found is the inability to specify font families See the Design Guidelines on page 163 for information on displaying images Cookies Cookies can be a useful feature in maintaining the state of a user when interacting with a Web site HTTP provides no state information such as when or how often a user visits a site Cookies allow Web sites to track this information by storing a simple set of values on the browser for the current session Usually browsers also provide the ability to save cookies to disk to retain this information between sessions However the 4630 IP Telephone Web Browser has no such ability to save any data between sessions Cookies do behave well within the realm of the current session and can be used if desired The 4630 IP Telephone has a maximum of 8Kilobytes of data available for cookie storage 162 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Design Guidelines Design Guidelines This s
235. network equipment the 4600 Series IP Telephones use a variety of protocols particularly TCP and UDP to communicate with other equipment in that network numerous different types of servers routers other telephones etc Part of this communication identifies which TCP and or UDP ports each piece of equipment uses to support each protocol and each task within the protocol Depending on your network you might need to know what ports or ranges are used in the 4600 Series IP Telephones operation Knowing these ports or ranges allows you to appropriately administer your networking infrastructure In this case you will find the following material useful 36 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide TCP UDP Port Utilization In Figure 1 Figure 2 and Figure 3 The box on the left always represents the 4600 Series IP Telephone Depending on the diagram the boxes on the right refer to various pieces of network equipment with which the telephone can or will communicate Open headed arrows for example gt represent the direction s of socket initialization Closed headed arrows for example a p gt represent the direction s of data transfer The text the arrows point to identifies the port or ports that the 4600 Series IP Telephones support for the specific situation Brackets identify ranges when more than one port applies In addition the text indicates any additional qualifications or clarifications In
236. ng spaces At least one address in Option 6 must be a valid non zero dotted decimal address Otherwise DNS will fail Option 15 DNS Domain Name This string contains the domain name to be used when DNS names in system parameters are resolved into IP Addresses This domain name is appended to the DNS name before the 4600 IP Telephone attempts to resolve the DNS address Option 15 is necessary if you want to use a DNS name for the TFTP server Otherwise you can specify a DOMAIN as part of customizing TFTP as indicated in DNS Addressing on page 110 Option 51 DHCP lease time Optional Avaya recommends a lease time of six weeks or greater Expired leases cause Avaya IP Telephones to reboot Avaya recommends providing enough leases so an IP Address for an IP telephone does not change if it is briefly taken offline Issue 7 October 2007 59 Server Administration Note The DHCP standard states that when a DHCP lease expires the device should immediately cease using its assigned IP Address If the network has problems and the only DHCP server is centralized the server is not accessible to the given telephone In this case the telephone is not usable until the server can be reached Avaya recommends that once assigned an IP Address the telephone continues using that address after the DHCP lease expires until a conflict with another device is detected As Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters indicates the s
237. nonetheless can contribute to improved QoS for the entire network 82 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide QoS IEEE 802 1D and 802 1Q IEEE s 802 1Q standard defines a tag that can be added to voice and data packets Most of the information associated with this tag deals with Virtual LAN VLAN management but 3 bits are reserved for identifying packet priority These 3 bits allow any one of 8 priorities to be assigned to a specific packet As defined in the standard the 8 priorities are from highest to lowest e 7 Network management traffic e 6 Voice traffic with less than 10ms latency e 5 Voice traffic with less than 100ms latency e 4 Controlled load traffic for mission critical data applications e 3 Traffic meriting extra effort by the network for prompt delivery for example executives e mail e 2 Reserved for future use e 0 Traffic meriting the network s best effort for prompt delivery This is the default priority e 1 Background traffic such as bulk data transfers and backups Note Priority 0 is a higher priority than Priority 1 To support IEEE 802 1D Q the 4600 Series IP Telephones can be administered either of two ways e from the network by appropriate administration of the DHCP or TFTP HTTP servers as covered in 4600 Series IP Telephone Scripts and Application Files on page 76 or e at the telephone itself using dialpad input as covered under local administrative p
238. ns e on hook dialing cannot be invoked e limited to the calling capability administered for PSA Personal Station Access on the call server for example only outgoing calls permitted subject to call server Class of Restriction Class of Service limitations and e can be converted to normal named registration by a valid extension and password entry IEEE 802 1X As of Release 2 6 certain IP telephones support the IEEE 802 1X standard for pass through and Supplicant operation The system parameter DOT1X determines how applicable telephones handle 802 1X multicast packets and proxy logoff as follows e When DOT1X 0 the telephone forwards 802 1X multicast packets from the Authenticator to the PC attached to the telephone and forwards multicast packets from the attached PC to the Authenticator multicast pass through Proxy Logoff is not supported e When DOT 1X 1 the telephone supports the same multicast pass through as when DOT1X 0 Proxy Logoff is supported e When DOT 1X 2 the telephone forwards multicast packets from the Authenticator only to the telephone ignoring multicast packets from the attached PC no multicast pass through Proxy Logoff is not supported e Regardless of the DOT1X setting the telephone always properly directs unicast packets from the Authenticator to the telephone or its attached PC as dictated by the MAC address in the packet 92 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide IEEE 802 1X
239. nt File name Specifies the loadable language file on the HTTP server for the Large Text Font 0 to 32 ASCII characters SET LANGLARGEFONT mlf_s12_v10_english_large txt GOTO END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 9640 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH FETERE PETE TERE EEE TEE ETE TEETER APE ET EE TEE a Introduction Issue 7 October 2007 241 Sample Upgrade Script File SETTINGS9650 FERRE AEE AEE EAE EAE AEE ERE EEA EEE A H This section contains the phone model specific settings for the 9650 telephone H 7H AUDIO SETTINGS 4 H Headset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the headset H setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 one level softer than NORMAL 2 two levels softer than NORMAL 3 three levels softer than NORMAL H 4 OFF inaudible 5 one level louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHD 0 Handset Sidetone Controls the level of sidetone in the handset setting level 0 NORMAL level for most users default 1 one level softer than NORMAL 2 two levels softer than NORMAL 3 three levels softer than NORMAL H 4 OFF inaudible 5 one level louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHS 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH WML BROWSER SETTINGS 44HHHHHHHHHHHHE The WMLHOME setting is used to enable and administer the Web Application H WMLIDLEURI may be used as an idle screen when the ph
240. ntal scrollbar to view the text lt hr gt indicates that a newline and a horizontal rule line should be inserted between the previous text and text following the lt hr gt tag lt blockquote gt indicates that the following text is a quote and should be offset in some way The embedded text is shown with newlines before and after the text with spacing to the left and right Within that block of text normal wrapping rules apply lt q gt indicates that the following text is a short quote and should be shown in double quotes according to documentation This text appears as normal text with no physical identifying indications lt h1 gt lt h6 gt indicate heading sections Each level is one point smaller than the previous level with lt h1 gt being the largest The section titled Maintaining Context on page 165 contains design guidelines for maintaining user context Issue 7 October 2007 157 Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Lists and Tables For presentation of data in a logical format lists and tables are two of the more important sets of tags Since space is at a premium in the browser tables should be used with discretion While they provide sets of text which are easy for the eye to process they can quickly become cumbersome if misused in this browser Both width and height are limited so the data provided in the table cells should be short pieces of text Beyond that the page designer s
241. ntent to a single telephone a group of phones or the entire enterprise Push Content Three types of content can be pushed with one of two types of priorities normal and barge in The content types are e Text Messages on the top display line If a pushed text message has barge in priority the message overwrites whatever else is currently displayed However other subsequent messages can in turn overwrite the pushed message If the pushed text message has normal priority it is buffered in the telephone and displayed when no higher priority message is being displayed Up to 56 characters can be pushed to the top line in a given message e WML Web pages can be pushed to the telephone s WML browser If a pushed Web page has barge in priority the content overwrites whatever else is currently displayed to the user If the push of a Web page has normal priority the Web page does not override what the user sees If the user has the Web application displayed normal priority pushed content overrides what is otherwise displayed If the Web application is not being displayed normal priority pushed content loads in the background When the user invokes the Web application the pushed content displays subject to certain restrictions For this reason you might want to accompany a Web push with a corresponding pushed text message alerting users there is Web content to view Issue 7 October 2007 173 The Push Feature e Audio Messages RTP
242. nuous transmission during a call The traffic is not bursty and the conversation uses a specific amount of bandwidth between the two ends during the call Several features of data networks are unsuitable for voice telephony e Data network design delivers data at the destination but not necessarily within a certain time producing delay latency In data networks delay tends to be variable For voice messages variable delay results in jitter an audible choppiness in conversations e Variable routing also can result in loss of timing synchronization so packets are not received at the destination in the proper order e Data networks have a strong emphasis on error correction resulting in repeated transmissions Data network concepts include prioritization of traffic types to provide some form of greater traffic reliability for example for interactive transactions However data requirements tend to not be as strict as most voice requirements The 4600 Series IP Telephones include a dynamic jitter buffer This feature automatically smooths jitter to improve audio quality 26 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Overview of Voice over IP VoIP Tandem Coding Tandem coding also called transcoding refers to converting a voice signal from analog to digital and back again When calls are routed over multiple IP facilities they can be subject to multiple transcodings The multiple conversions between analog and digita
243. o 63 ASCII characters no spaces SET WTKEYP3 westkey EAP type for Access Profile 3 0 for disable 1forTLS 2 for LEAP 3 for PEAP GTC 4 for PEAP MSCHAPV2 5 for TTLS CHAP 6 for TTLS MD5 7 for TTLS MSCHAP 8 for TTLS MSCHAPV2 SET EAPTYPEP3 0 Domain Name Server for Access Profile 3 SET DNSSRVRP3 198 152 25 15 HH DNS domain for Access Profile 3 SET DOMAINPS west mycompany com 192 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide H Introduction FREER AEA AEE HE AEE EE AE EE AEE A EE A A eitis HH HH H HH HE 46xx SETTINGS Settings applicable to 46xx telephone models FEE EE HEA AEE HE EAE EE AE EE AE A EA EE A A H IP Filter List Addresses H HH HH H HH H HH HH Specifies additional IP Addresses whose packets are allowed through the IP source address filter to be processed by the telephone This parameter should be set only if it is suspected that an address is being blocked unnecessarily This parameter may contain one or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS name format separated by commas without any intervening spaces 0 to 255 ASCII characters including commas SET FILTERLIST 192 168 0 45 H HHHHH 46XX IP Phone Multi Language Administration HH This setting is used to set the local display language of your 46XX telephone HH HH HH HH HH HH H HH HH H H HH
244. o follow the HTML rules The following tags make up the basic skeleton of an HTML document lt html gt indicates the start of an HTML document lt head gt indicates the start of an HTML document s header Title meta definitions ECMAScript function definition document level style sheet definition and external style sheet inclusion are all done in the header section lt title gt sets the title of the document This is usually shown in the frame of the browser window On the telephone the title is shown in the Top Line Information Display Area lt body gt indicates the start of the body of an HTML document The rest of the document is embedded between the start and end lt body gt tags lt meta gt adds additional information about an HTML page Web walking tools usually use this tag which is of little use in browsers and has no effect on the telephone Content Based Style Content based tags deal with identifying words phrases or chunks of text or images as having a specific meaning or context The intent of content based tags is not to show physically marked text However it is not wrong for a browser to show content based text in a distinct style such as font style Each content based tag is shown with a brief description and any physical effects imposed by the browser lt abbr gt indicates an abbreviation Using this tag has no effect lt address gt indicates an address Using this tag has no effect
245. on for SCEP protocol zero or one IP Address in dotted decimal or DNS name format followed by optional colon and port number SET HTTPPROXY proxy mycompany com H HTTP Exception Domains A list of one or more HTTP proxy server exception domains separated by commas without any spaces SCEP accesses to these addresses will not go through the proxy server SET HTTPEXCEPTIONDOMAINS mycompany com 135 20 21 20 H Certificate Common Name Common Name CN specified for SUBJECT of SCEP certificate request Use SERIALNO for phone s serial number Use MACADDR for phone s MAC address SET MYCERTCN SERIALNO H Certificate Distinguished Name Specifies the part of SUBJECT in a certificate request which is common for requests from different phones May include Organizational Unit Organization Location State Country 0 to xx ASCII characters beginning with SET MYCERTDN C US ST NJ L My Town O MyCompany H Certificate Authority Identifier specifies the certificate with which the certificate request will be signed Used especially by CAs that host mustiple CAs for example EJBCA Some CAs will ignore this parameter if they act as only one CA for example Microsoft CA SET MYCERTCAID EjbSubCA H Certificate Key Length specifies length of certificate private key for phone 1024 2048 SET MYCERTKEYLEN 1024 212 46
246. on Unit Size Specifies the maximum frame length MTU size transmitted by the phone Use 1496 for older Ethernet switches 1496 or 1500 SET MTU_SIZE 1500 Media Encryption Support Specifies media encryption SRTP options supported by Introduction Issue 7 October 2007 203 Sample Upgrade Script File phone Up to 2 options may be selected Values are in comma separated list Options should match those specified in CM IP codec set form 1 aescm128 hmac80 2 aescm128 hmac32 3 aescm128 hmac80 unauth 4 aescm128 hmac32 unauth 5 aescm128 hmac80 unenc 6 aescm128 hmac32 unenc 7 aescm128 hmac80 unenc unauth 8 aescm128 hmac32 unenc unauth 9 none default SET MEDIAENCRYPTION 1 9 HHHHHHHHHH HH HAHAH DISPLAY SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Display Colors and Layout Specifies a list of tuples describing color scheme and layout used in phone display See Administrator s guide for additional detail 0 to 1023 ASCII characters SET SKINS Yankees http mycompany com skins yankees_color pinstripes xml Display Logo Specifies a list of tuples describing logo used as phone display background See Administrator s guide for additional detail SET LOGOS FIFAWorldCup fifa_logo jpg HH Options Menu Display Determines whether Options amp Settings menu is displayed on phone OforNo 1 for Yes
247. on that produces standards for communications on the internet Local Area Network Lightweight Directory Access Protocol an IETF standard for database organization and query exchange Link Layer Discovery Protocol All IP telephones with an Ethernet interface support the transmission and reception of LLDP frames on the Ethernet line interface in accordance with IEEE standard 802 1AB Media Access Control ID of an endpoint Encryption of the audio information exchanged between the IP telephone and the call server or far end telephone Network Address Port Translation Network Address Translation Off PBX Station Port Access Entity The protocol entity associated with a port The PAE supports the protocol functionality associated with the authenticator supplicant or both Hypertext Preprocessor software used to assist in the format and display of Web pages Power over Ethernet Public Switched Telephone Network the network used for traditional telephony Quality of Service used to refer to several mechanisms intended to improve audio quality over packet based networks A SIP server that accepts REGISTER requests The Registration Server places the information received in the requests into the location service for the domain the server handles Resource ReSerVation Protocol used by hosts to request resource reservations throughout a network RTP Control Protocol monitors quality of the RTP services and can provide re
248. one has been idle for WMLIDLETIME minutes By default 242 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Introduction this URL is NULL and this screen is not activated HH NOTES HH The WMLIDELURI idle screen is different than the Avaya screen saver activated by the SCREENSAVERON timer While it is possible to use WMLIDLEURI as an idle screen it is recommended that the SCREENSAVERON timer and the Avaya Screen Saver display be used for screen saver purposes HH Avaya hosts a web site for IP Phones The WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI parameters are set up to point your IP telephones to this hosted site To enable access to this site remove the from the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDLEURI lines To change the web site that your phones point to replace the provided URL in the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDELURI lines with the URL of your site SET WMLHOME http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 9600 home wml SET WMLIDLEURI http www mycompany com my_screen wml HH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Emergency Contact Number H If set this is the number dialed when the softkey labeled EMERGENCY is pressed The default is null but any valid phone number is acceptable H SET PHNEMERGNUM 911 HH HHHHHH 9650 H 323 Phone Multi Language Administration HH These settings are used to set the local display language of
249. oper one A previously installed telephone might not have the proper application file If the telephone determines the application file indicated in the script file is missing the telephone requests a download of the proper application file from the file server The file server then downloads the file and conducts some checks to ensure that the file was downloaded properly If the telephone determines it already has the proper file the telephone proceeds to the next step without downloading the application file again After checking and loading the application file the 4600 Series IP Telephone if appropriate uses the script file to look for a settings file The settings file can contain options you have administered for any or all of the 4600 Series IP Telephones in your network For more information about this settings file see Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones on page 98 Issue 7 October 2007 35 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols Step 4 Telephone and the Call Server The call server referred to in this step differs depending on whether the telephone is H 323 or SIP For H 323 IP telephones the call server is the Avaya Media Server For SIP IP telephones the call server is the Registration Server In this step the telephone and the call server exchange a series of messages which cause the display on the telephone to prompt the user For a new installation and for full service the user
250. or Avaya s VoIP offering Describes DHCP TFTP and HTTP administration for the 4600 Series IP and SIP IP Telephones Describes messages that might occur during the operation of the 4600 Series IP Telephones Provides a link to the MIB specification for the 46xx IP Telephones 4601 4601 4602 4602SW 4602SW 4606 4610SW 4612 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4624 4625SW and 4630 4630SW Provides information on creating and customizing Web sites for viewing on the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone Also describes the current capabilities and limitations of the 4630 4630SW s Web Browser Provides information on creating and customizing Web sites for viewing on the 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones Provides information on administering an LDAP directory for the 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones Provides information about the Push feature available as of Release 2 1 Provides a detailed example of a 46xx upgrade script file Issue 7 October 2007 11 Introduction Change History Issue 1 0 Issue 1 1 Issue 1 5 Issue 1 6 Issue 1 7 Issue 1 8 Issue 2 0 Issue 2 1 Issue 2 2 Issue 2 2 1 Issue 2 3 Issue 3 Issue 4 Issue 5 Issue 6 Issue 7 This document was issued for the first time in November 2000 This version of the document revised and issued in April 2001 supports through DEFINITY Release 9 This version of the document
251. ore Information on Push The specifications and interactions of pushed content are beyond the scope of this document The 4600 Series IP Telephones Application Programmer Interface API Guide provides detailed information about developing Push content and administering the Push feature Find the API on the Avaya support Web site http www avaya com support Further information including sample applications is also available in a Software Developer Toolkit on the Avaya support Web site For more detailed assistance in developing applications also visit the Solutions Directory on Avaya s Developer Connect Web page www avaya com gcm master usa en us corporate alliances developerconnection index htm and follow the Find a Solution link The Directory has a list of companies you can work with to develop applications The Solutions Directory lists all current Developer Connection Program Members with whom you can work to develop applications and their innovative solutions The members in this directory have all been approved in the program and are compliance tested to assure customer satisfaction 174 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Appendix F Sample Upgrade Script File Introduction Each software release provides an updated script file a sample of which is shown below The filenames following the SET APPNAME command in this sample are examples only and may not match those used in production FERRE ETE HEA TERE
252. ot respond to a traceroute if Internet Control Message Protocol Destination Unreachable transmission ICMPDU has been set to zero All 4600 Series IP Telephones respond appropriately to a ping or a traceroute message sent from the Communication Manager or any other source on your network These telephones will not in general initiate a ping or traceroute Release 1 6 of the 4600 Series IP Telephones supporting H 323 introduced remote ping and remote traceroute support The switch can instruct such a 4600 Series IP Telephone to initiate a ping or a traceroute to a specified IP Address The telephone carries out that instruction and sends a message to the switch indicating the results See your Communication Manager Administration documentation for more details As of Release 1 8 if applicable 4600 Series IP Telephones test whether the network Ethernet switch port supports IEEE 802 1D q tagged frames by ARPing the router with a tagged frame See VLAN Considerations on page 89 If your LAN environment includes Virtual LANs VLANs your router must respond to ARPs for VLAN tagging to work properly 42 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Suggestions for Installation and Configuration IP Address Lists and Station Number Portability Release 1 5 of the 4600 Series IP Telephones provided the capability to specify IP Address lists in either dotted decimal or DNS format Release 1 5 allowed key network elements to have
253. otocols the Session Initiation Protocol SIP and the H 323 protocol The chart below shows the 4600 Series IP Telephone models and the protocol s they support IP Telephone Model H323 Protocol Supported SIP Protocol Supported 4601 4601 4602 4602SW 4602SW 4606 4610SW 4612 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4624 4625SW 4630 4630SW 4690 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No No No Issue 7 October 2007 9 Introduction Sets that support both protocols for example the 4610SW do not support each protocol simultaneously Instead a given telephone must be loaded with software that supports one protocol or the other Telephones with H 323 software work only with Avaya Communication Manager call servers Telephones with SIP software are supported only in Avaya server environments Note Unless otherwise indicated any reference to the DEFINITY server in this document also refers to the Avaya Communication Manager media servers Administration of the 4602 4602SW SIP Telephones with Release 1 x software is not covered in this guide See the 4602 SIP Telephone Administrator s Guide Document Number 16 300037 for information on administering these 4602 4602SW SIP Telephones Intended Audience This document is intended for personnel who administer e DHCP TFTP HTTP SIP Registration and or other
254. ovide support through Avaya Communication Manager Release 3 0 This version of this document was revised and issued in April 2006 to support Software Release 2 4 This version provides VLAN separation parameters an unnamed registration parameter and audio customization parameters This version of this document was revised and issued in August 2006 This version supports Avaya Communication Manager 3 1 and Software Release 2 6 New features for 802 1X authentication Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP and power conservation are introduced This version of this document was revised and issued in November 2006 to support Software Release 2 7 This version introduced additional Unicode languages support for dialpad activated Web links the capability to turn off the display backlight several new system parameters and two new local procedures This issue also introduced new telephone models and 4602SW which replace the 4601 and 4602 4602SW respectively This version of this document was revised and issued in February 2007 to support Software Release 2 8 This version introduced backup restore capabilities to HTTP servers additional security measures for TCP new system parameters for adding IP Source Addresses configuring HTTP ports and using HTTP filepaths and reduced time to service through Communication Manager 4 0 upgrades What s New in Issue 7 describes Release 2 8 in more detail This is the current version of this document revis
255. pad Local administrative procedures of note to LAN Administrators might be e QoS Option Setting to customize any or all of the QoS parameters locally e Secondary Ethernet Hub Interface Enable Disable to enable or disable the secondary Ethernet hub locally e Reset to return all system initialization values to the application software default values see The Reset Administrative Option on page 134 e View to view the 4600 IP Telephone system parameters see The View Administration Option on page 137 e Clear to remove all administered values user specified data and option settings etc see The Clear Administrative Option on page 132 e Restart to restart a particular telephone see Restart the Telephone on page 136 Chapter 3 of the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide details how to use all local administrative options 110 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Enhanced Local Dialing Enhanced Local Dialing The 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW and 4630 4630SW have a variety of telephony related applications e g Speed Dial Call Log Web Browser etc These applications might obtain a telephone number during operation For example the Call Log saves an incoming caller s number while the Web browser might obtain a dialable link from a corporate Web site Before Release 1 8 software when the user indicated a desire to call one of these incoming numbers the 4610SW 4620 4
256. pear for a short time If the message appears for an extended time period the telephone is unable to RESOLUTION Verify proper operation of the Registration Server s and the intervening network CAUSE The registration process failed RESOLUTION Verify the proper operation administration of the Registration Server s and the intervening network CAUSE The Avaya Media Server rejects the registration request RESOLUTION Verify your Avaya Media Server administration to ensure the telephone s proper IP Address extension and password are being used CAUSE Protocol timeout error RESOLUTION Retry If failure continues check network congestion addresses etc to identify cause of timeout CAUSE The Registration Server does not recognize the extension and password RESOLUTION Reenter the correct extension and password If the problem persists contact the System Administrator CAUSE An error has occurred without an identifiable cause RESOLUTION Conduct self test restart the telephone and if no other cause becomes evident replace the telephone CAUSE The Avaya Media Server does not recognize the set type RESOLUTION Ensure that the Avaya Media Server is properly administered to expect the appropriate telephones for the IP Address and extension 5 of 7 Issue 7 October 2007 145 Troubleshooting Guidelines Table 16 Possible Error Messages During Installation or Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephone
257. phone The remainder of the procedure depends on the status of the boot and application files See Appendix A of the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide 136 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide The View Administration Option The View Administration Option If you are using static addressing and encounter problems use this procedure to verify the current values of system parameters and file versions Note Also use the ADDR option to view IP Addresses covered in Static Addressing Installation in Chapter 3 of 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide P Addresses might have been entered incorrectly Verify whether you were provided with correct IP Addresses If PROCPSWD is administered as indicated in Chapter 4 Server Administration you must type the Local Procedure password after pressing Mute and before pressing VIE W The 4601 and 4601 IP Telephone do not support static addressing and therefore do not support the V E W command 1 While the telephone is on hook and idle press the following sequence of keys on the faceplate of the telephone Mute 8 4 3 9 Mute V I E W Note Press the Mute button momentarily Do not press this key while pressing other keys The 4630 IP Telephone does not have a dedicated Hold button For all other 4600 Series IP Telephones pressing the Hold button instead of the Mute button also works The following text displays left justified at the top of the di
258. phone is suppressed The Redial buffer stores only one number The Redial application does not display since the user can redial only one number This restriction allows a certain measure of privacy once a given user has left the telephone Note that you can e set APPSTAT to 1 for example in a staging area e administer a given telephone with Speed Dial entries of your choice like the Concierge Speed Dial button in an earlier example e then move the telephone to where it will be used where you have administered APPSTAT to be say 0 zero When the relocated telephone resets it retains its Speed Dial entries like Concierge but does not allow the user to create new entries When you set APPSTAT to any valid value other than 1 the telephone does not accept any Speed Dial button label changes that might have been made directly on an FTP backup file Only the telephone s existing labels are used This restriction prevents circumvention of the APPSTAT restrictions APPSTAT has no effect on telephones having no user selectable applications such as the 4602 Also to suppress the WML applications all you have to do is not administer the appropriate parameters In essence these applications are suppressed by default 122 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Backup Restore for 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones Backup Restore for 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones
259. plication that can be administered between your network and the Internet The NAT translates network layer IP Addresses so your local intranet IP Addresses can duplicate global Internet addresses A detailed discussion of NAT is beyond the scope of this document Note that NAT use can lead to problems that affect the consistency of addressing throughout your network In Release 1 6 and earlier releases of the 4600 Series IP Telephones NAT is not recommended for networks handling IP based telephony traffic As of Release 1 7 all 4600 Series H 323 IP Telephones support NAT interworking Therefore no problems exist with NAT and these H 323 IP telephones Note that support for NAT does not imply support for Network Address Port Translation NAPT Specifically the H 323 IP telephones do not support communication to the PBX through any NAPT device SIP IP telephones do not support NAT NAT requires specific administration on the media server The capability to have a direct Avaya IP Telephone to Avaya IP Telephone call with NAT also called NAT shuffling requires Avaya Communication Manager Release 1 3 software See the Administration for Network Connectivity document listed in Related Documents on page 17 QoS Quality of Service QoS is a term covering several initiatives to maximize the voice quality heard at both ends of a call that originates or terminates on an IP based telephone These initiatives include various prioritization sche
260. push allowed For example if the value is 222 everything is allowed if the value is 111 no barge in is allowed and the value 200 signifies both a normal and barge in audio push but not a Web or Top Line push PUSHPORT 80 Destination TCP port for the telephone s HTTP server Valid values are 80 to 65535 SYSLANG English Optional and Language of the 4610SW 4620 4620SW can be 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW user user specified interface in ASCII independent of the MultiVantage message language Options are English Deutsche Espanol Francais Italiano Nederlands Portugues and Katakana Japanese In addition to these languages the 4610SW 4620SW and 4625SW also support simplified Chinese Korean Russian and Hebrew The 4610SW and 4620SW also support Japanese Kanji UNNAMEDSTAT 1 Optional Unnamed Registration Status Specifies whether unnamed registration is initiated if a user fails to enter a value at the Password prompt Valid values are 0 Off 1 On For more information see Unnamed Registration 2 of 4 Issue 7 October 2007 119 Server Administration Table 12 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Status Description and Value Range Web Access Application Parameters SUBSCRIBELIST Null Optional Subscription list for potential pushed content List of zero or more fully qualified URLs
261. rd Hands Free Answer HFA is administered but the telephone did not automatically answer a call The TFTP application terminates and asks for registration The TFTP or HTTP script file and settings file are ignored not being used by the telephone CAUSE The Speaker was turned off on the PBX H 323 telephones or the 46xxsettings file s SPEAKERSTAT parameter is set to 0 SIP telephones RESOLUTION Administer the PBX to allow that station s Speaker to operate H 323 telephones or change the SPEAKERSTAT parameter value SIP telephones If that does not work do a Self test on the telephone as explained in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide CAUSE The TN2302AP circuit pack does not pass in band DTMF tones RESOLUTION None the board is operating as designed CAUSE PBX suppresses sidetone DTMF RESOLUTION On PBX administration on the Change System Parameters screen enable On Hook Dialing If the user has Hands Free Answer HFA answers a call using the Speaker and switches to the handset pressing dialpad buttons does not send DTMF tones This is a known bug and the only current resolution is to disable HFA CAUSE HFA only works if the telephone is idle A second call is ignored if it comes in while a call is in progress including ringing before the first call is answered RESOLUTION None CAUSE Non Avaya shareware or freeware TFTP applications often cease operating to request regi
262. re certificate filenames separated by commas without any intervening spaces Files may contain only PEM formatted certificates cacert1 pem for 3631 Access Profile 1 cacert2 pem for 3631 Access Profile 2 cacert3 pem for 3631 Access Profile 3 SET TRUSTCERTS cacert1 pem cacert2 pem cacert3 pem Regulatory domain country for 3631 telephone 0 to 2 ASCII characters no spaces SET WTREGDOM US HE Data rate for 3631 telephone 1 for Auto 2 for 1 Mbps 4 for 2 Mbps 11 for 5 5 Mbps 12 for 6 Mbps 18 for 9 Mbps 22 for 11 Mbps 24 for 12 Mbps 36 for 18 Mbps 48 for 24 Mbps 72 for 36 Mbps 96 for 48 Mbps 108 for 54 Mbps SET WTRATE 1 Fragmentation threshold for 3631 telephone 256 3000 SET WTFRAG 3000 Request to send RTS threshold for 3631 telephone 0 3000 SET WTRTS 3000 188 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH ACCESS PROFILE 1 SETTINGS 4 HHHHH HH Name for Access Profile 1 0 to 31 ASCII characters no spaces SET WTPROF1 North HH SSID for Access Profile 1 0 to 31 ASCII characters no spaces SET WTSSIDP1 north mycompany WMM mode for Access Profile 1 O for off 1 foron SET WTWMMP1 0 Power save mode for Access Profile 1 O for off 1 foron SET WTPWRSAVP1 1 Security mode for Access Profile
263. rectory path to backup file Do not specify backup file name BRURI is not supported on 96xx SIP phones SET BRURI http 192 168 0 28 H HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH AUDIBLE ALERTING HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH H Specifies the audible alerting setting for the telephone and whether users may change this setting H A value of 0 turns off audible alerting user cannot adjust ringer volume at all A value of 1 turns on audible alerting user can adjust ringer volume but cannot turn off audible alerting A value of 2 turns off audible alerting user can adjust ringer volume and can turn off audible alerting A value of 3 turns on audible alerting user can adjust ringer volume and can turn off audible alerting The default value is 3 HH SET AUDASYS 3 HH PETER PEER TREE TET TEETER AEE ETE TET 3631 SETTINGS HE Settings applicable to 3631 telephone model FEAEHE EEE EEH HHE EEE EHE EE WMM mode for 3631 telephone May be overridden by WMM mode specified in Access Profile O for off 1foron SET WTWMM 0 Issue 7 October 2007 187 Sample Upgrade Script File H Power save mode for 3631 telephone May be overridden by power save mode specified in Access Profile O for off 1 foron SET WTPWRSAV 1 Authentication Certificates List of trusted certificates to download to phone This parameter may contain one or mo
264. red RESOLUTION Edit the script file with a Windows based editor or another editor that does not strip out the lt Carriage Return gt CAUSE UNIX and LINUX systems use case sensitive addressing and file labels RESOLUTION Verify the file names and path in the script file are accurately specified CAUSE The 46xxupgrade scr file was edited incorrectly renamed etc RESOLUTION Download a clean copy of the 46xxupgrade scr file from the Avaya support Web site and do not edit or rename it Customize or change only the 46xxsettings file as discussed in Chapter 4 Server Administration CAUSE The TFTP or HTTP server stops responding if power is interrupted while a telephone is saving the application file RESOLUTION Restart the TFTP or HTTP server as applicable CAUSE Early versions of the 4600 Series IP Telephones erroneously report being a Token Ring device With most DHCP servers this does not matter Some LINUX servers however refuse to issue addresses to Ethernet devices reporting to be Token Ring devices RESOLUTION Administer the DHCP server to delete all MAC and IP Addresses associated with Lucent Technologies or Avaya or allow the associated DHCP leases to expire CAUSE Use of IP telephone firmware R2 3 and greater requires TN799C V3 or greater RESOLUTION Upgrade TN circuit packs to TN799C V3 or greater 5 of 6 130 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Error Conditions Table 1
265. relative URL for a hyperlink When using the target attribute never use the _blank name With the exception of frames the 4630 IP Telephone Web Browser is not intended to be a multi window browser Thus if a page attempts to reference a new non frame window the browser becomes confused and a reboot is necessary e lt base gt defines the default target to be used in all lt a gt tags This is done by setting the target attribute of the lt base gt tag If the target attribute is set in the lt a gt tag the lt base gt tag value is ignored Using the target attribute with the Web Access Application is strongly discouraged because the application supports a single window for browsing The use of the target attribute can cause the browser software to create a new window that is outside the Web Access Application s control Frames Frames allow multiple windows to be created on the browser s base window The browser is effectively split up into multiple areas Each frame can be given a name or ID Using the target attribute of the lt a gt tag a Web page can be displayed in another frame Although frames behave as defined the small size of the screen makes them impractical to use Just like tables frames take up too much room on the display One can though take advantage of frames by having a small table of contents frame with images for links In general however use of frames is strongly discouraged e lt frameset gt de
266. res the third telephone cannot get a lease until the reservation period expires Even if you remove the other two telephones from the network the third telephone remains without a lease until the reservation period expires In Table 4 the 4600 Series IP Telephone sets the system values to the DHCPACK message field values shown Table 4 DHCPACK Setting of System Values System Value Set to IPADD The yiaddr field NETMASK Option 1 if received GIPADD The first four octets of Option 3 if received TFTPSRVR The first four octets of the siaddr field The rest of this section describes some common DHCP servers 62 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide DHCP Windows NT 4 0 DHCP Server This section contains details on how to verify and configure the DHCP server included in the Windows NT 4 0 server operating system Use Verifying the Installation of the DHCP Server to verify whether the DHCP server is installed If it is not install the DHCP server If it is installed go to the section Initial Configuration on page 63 and the subsequent sections Verifying the Installation of the DHCP Server Use the following procedure to verify whether the DHCP server is installed 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel 2 Double click the Network icon 3 Verify that Microsoft DHCP Server is listed as one of the Network Services on the Services tab 4 If it is listed go to the following sect
267. rief description and any physical effects the browser imposes lt b gt indicates that the text appears in a bold font weight lt big gt indicates that the text appears one point size larger than the current text lt i gt indicates that the text appears in an italic font lt small gt indicates that the text appears one point size smaller than the current text lt sub gt indicates that the text appears as a subscript to the current text The text is shown one point size smaller lt sup gt indicates that the text appears as a superscript to the current text The text is shown one point size smaller lt tt gt indicates that the text appears as teletype text The text is shown in a monospaced typeface font Physical Spacing and Layout Physical spacing and layout tags define the basic structure of a document Headings paragraphs tables and lists all provide some basic physical and logical layout to a page Each spacing and layout tag is shown with a brief description and any unusual behavior is described lt p gt indicates the start of a new paragraph A blank line is inserted between previous text and text following the lt p gt tag lt br gt indicates to insert a breakpoint A newline is inserted between previous text and text following the lt br gt tag lt pre gt indicates no formatting rules apply to the text that follows This implies that no wrapping will be applied to this text which can result in adding a horizo
268. ries IP Telephone IP Address of the Gatekeeper board on the Avaya Media Server applicable only to H 323 IP telephones IP Address of the TFTP server if applicable otherwise the HTTP or HTTPS server The subnet mask IP Address of the router DNS Server IP Address Administer the LAN so each IP telephone can access a DHCP server containing the IP Addresses and subnet mask listed 32 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide 4600 Series IP Telephones The IP telephone cannot function without an IP Address The failure of a DHCP server at boot time leaves all the affected voice terminals unusable A user can manually assign an IP Address to an IP telephone This can cause a problem when the DHCP server finally returns because the telephone never looks for a DHCP server unless the static IP data is unassigned manually In addition manual entry of IP data is an error prone process Avaya therefore strongly recommends that a DHCP server be available when the IP telephone reboots If a DHCP server is not available at remote sites during WAN failures the IP telephone is not available after a reboot A minimum of two DHCP servers are recommended for reliability Avaya strongly recommends that a DHCP server be available at remote sites if WAN failures isolate IP telephones from the central site DHCP server s The file server provides the 4600 Series IP Telephone with a script file and if appropriate new or updated application software S
269. ries IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide The Clear Administrative Option CLEAR then restores all such data to default values The C L E A R option does not affect the software load itself so if you have upgraded the telephone the telephone retains the latest software Once a telephone is Cleared you can administer it normally CAUTION This procedure erases all administered data without any possibility of recovering the data Note Only telephones with Release 2 1 or later software support the CLEAR Administrative Option Use the following procedure to clear the telephone of its administrative user assigned and options values 1 While the telephone is on hook and idle press the following sequence of keys on the faceplate of the telephone Mute 2 5 3 27 Mute C LE A R Note Press the Mute button momentarily Do not press this button while pressing other keys buttons The 4630 4630SW IP Telephones and the 4690 IP Conference Telephone do not have a dedicated Hold button For all other 4600 Series IP Telephones pressing the Hold button instead of the Mute button also works The following text displays left justified at the top of the display Clear all values no yes 2 If you do not want to clear all values press no to terminate the procedure and retain the current values A screen displays the following prompt on the top line Are you sure no yes 3 Press the button to termi
270. rocedures in the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide Eight IEEE 802 1D Q QoS parameters in the telephones can be administered as follows The first five parameters are for standard 802 1Q tagging and apply to any 4600 Series IP Telephone The last three parameters apply to all 4600 Series IP Telephones with a secondary Ethernet interface e L2Q 802 1Q framing parameter 1 On 2 Off or O AUTO The default is 0 but the preferred setting is 1 ON You can manually set the L2Q value of a specific 4600 IP Telephone to any value for example AUTO ON or OFF However any subsequent value administered via DHCP or TFTP HTTP settings file will override the manual value To use the QoS Local Administrative Option to set L2Q manually see the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide e L2QVLAN the VLAN ID on which the telephone should operate For example what VLAN ID to use for DHCP Discovery etc up to 4 digits from 0 to 4094 default is 0 e VLANTEST the number of seconds to wait for a DHCPOFFER when using a non zero VLAN ID up to 3 digits from 0 to 999 default is 60 Issue 7 October 2007 83 Server Administration e L2QAUD 802 1Q VoIP voice user RTP traffic priority value between 0 and 7 default is 6 e L2QSIG 802 1Q VoIP voice user Call Control Signaling traffic priority value between 0 and 7 default is 6 e VLANSEP enables VLAN separation when set to 1 the default disables VLAN separation when set
271. roduct may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information identifying Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on Avaya s Web site at http support avaya com ThirdPartyLicense Interference Using a cell mobile or GSM telephone or a two way radio in close proximity to an Avaya IP Telephone might cause interference Security See http support avaya com security to locate and or report known vulnerabilities in Avaya products See http support avaya com to locate the latest software patches and upgrades For information about secure configuration of equipment and mitigation of toll fraud threats see the Avaya Toll Fraud and Security Handbook at http support avaya com Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 002 eee eee ee es 9 ADOUT THIS Guid 4 6 64 o 6 Rd Oe Re RR ee ia 9 Intended Audience 2 0 0 ee ee 10 Document Organizatlon 2 2085c8 ee bee ee eee eee eee eee 11 Ghange History 1 642 i 2d eho kai Eres Eran HO SH RSs 12 What s NewinIssue7 2 0 eee 13 Terms Used in This Guide 0 002 eee eee ee ee es 13 Conventions Used in This Guide 20 00002 cease 16 Symbolic Conventions lt i sisir seseris resres eden ens 16 Typographic Conventions 2 00 ee eee e
272. rt 25 SMTPSRVR is non null and if IRSTAT is 1 Port 80 for Pre Release 2 6 Port PUSHPORT for Release 2 6 and later Port any unused E Port any unused Jj lt gt IR Object Relay is only supported by the 4620 and 4620SW ae Traceroute Transmission UDP IP ae Syslog Transmission UDP IP TCP UDP Port Utilization Another 4600 Series Push Server Port any Port 33434 1 for each hop BM Port 514 Issue 7 October 2007 41 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols Suggestions for Installation and Configuration Reliability and Performance There is a cost performance trade off associated with Voice over IP Greater reliability and improved performance can be obtained through server redundancy and components with higher bandwidth capabilities The reliability and performance of the traditional PBX systems are very high to date Much of the LAN is outside the PBX s control However consider the points in the next paragraph to enhance the reliability and performance of the IP telephone network All 4600 Series IP Telephones support the tools ping and traceroute These are standard LAN WAN tools to identify e whether two points on a network can communicate with each other and e what path a sample communication takes as it traverses the network from one point to the other As of R2 6 the telephone will n
273. s Condition Cause Resolution The telephone continually reboots or reboots continuously about every 15 minutes Message Waiting Indicators MWI not working on 46xx SIP endpoints The message light on the telephone turns on and off intermittently but the telephone never registers The telephone stops working in the middle of a call AND no lights are lit on the telephone and the display is not lit AND power to the telephone is fine and the telephone might have gone through the restarting sequence CAUSE The telephone cannot find the call server RESOLUTION Ensure that MCIPADD is administered either manually or through DHCP TFTP or HTTP as appropriate CAUSE This might be a firmware fault because the MAC address in memory is corrupted RESOLUTION Return the telephone to Avaya for repair CAUSE The MWISRVR variable may not be getting downloaded to the endpoint RESOLUTION Verify the MWISRVR variable is set correctly in the 46xx_settings txt file Verify the 46xx_settings txt file is being downloaded to the endpoint this can be done by getting an ethereal trace during the endpoint registration CAUSE This is a hardware fault RESOLUTION The telephone must be returned to Avaya for repair CAUSE Loss of power RESOLUTION Check the connections between the telephone the power supply and the power jack For example verify that either static addressing was not used or that any changes
274. s continued Error Message Cause Resolution During Operation Connecting Discover aaa bbb ccc ddd Discovering CAUSE The telephone and the H 323 call server have agreed to carry out the Time to Service TTS feature and the user has indicated a need to communicate with the call server e g by going off hook or by pressing a feature button when the telephone does not have a TCP connection to the call server This typically occurs during a brief interval after completion of registration or as a result of a network outage that caused an existing TCP connection to be lost the message indicates the telephone acknowledges the user intent and is attempting to re establish the TCP connection RESOLUTION The telephone will automatically attempt to re establish the TCP link for an administrable period 75 seconds is the default after which the telephone will attempt to register with the next gatekeeper on its list If the network outage continues appropriate analysis of the outage should be conducted CAUSE The 46xx telephone is attempting to discover and register with the Gatekeeper at IP Address aaa bbb ccc ddd RESOLUTION If this message appears for more than a few seconds especially if the IP Address keeps changing the telephone is unable to contact the Gatekeeper Verify network connectivity between the telephone and the Gatekeeper or revise the Gatekeeper addresses in the DHCP script files to point to diff
275. s off VLAN ID cccc Up to 4 ASCII characters L2EQVLAN if 802 1Q tagging is on and none if 802 1Q tagging is off IP Address nnn nnn nnn nnn Up to 15 ASCII characters IPADD Subnet mask Router File server Call server nnNnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nNNN nNNN NNN NNN NNNNN nNNN nNNN NNN NNN NNNNN Up to 15 ASCII characters NETMASK Up to 15 ASCII characters the IP Address of the router in use Up to 21 ASCII characters the IP Address and port of last file server used successfully during initialization 0 0 0 0 if no HTTP or TFTP file server was used successfully Up to 21 ASCII characters IP Address and port of call server currently in use if any otherwise 0 0 0 0 1 of 3 138 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide The View Administration Option Table 15 Viewing Parameter Values continued Name System Value Format 802 1X Group Protocol Build DHCPSTD Audio environment pass thru mode pass thru with Logoff Supplicant mode nnn CCCCCCCC filename ext ccccccc Ethernet filename ext CCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCC If system parameter DOT1X 0 If system parameter DOT1X 1 If system parameter DOT1X 2 Up to 3 ASCII numeric characters GROUP Note As of Release 2 8 Communication Manager Release 3 1 3 and above supports the downloading of the GROUP settings upon registration of the individual phone Up to 8 ASCI
276. s Telephone was originally Address installed on one switch with Static Addressing and has subsequently been installed on another switch with an active DHCP server assigning dynamic IP Addresses RESOLUTION Reset the telephone 3 of 7 Issue 7 October 2007 143 Troubleshooting Guidelines Table 16 Possible Error Messages During Installation or Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Error Message Cause Resolution Incompatible IP Address Error Message light blinks on and off and the telephone did not complete registration NARAR ee Oe No Call Server Address Resetting No Proxy Found SIP only No Socket Password Error CAUSE This release of the Avaya Media Server does not support the current version of the IP telephone RESOLUTION Upgrade to the current version of Avaya Media Server software CAUSE The gatekeeper reports an invalid IP Address RESOLUTION This should never happen Contact Avaya CAUSE The telephone has a hardware fault RESOLUTION Replace the telephone CAUSE A device between the telephone and the call server is invoking Network Address Port Translation which the 4600 Series IP Telephones do not support RESOLUTION Contact the System Administrator to remove or re administer the NAPT device CAUSE The system parameter MCIPADD does not contain at least one non zero IP Address or DNS Name causing the telephone to res
277. s a high security technique to inhibit a sophisticated end user from obtaining access to local procedures Administering this password can limit access to all local procedures including V E W which is read only and would not change any settings in any case Note Parameters that do not specify H 323 or SIP apply to both protocols Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range AGCHAND 1 Automatic Gain Control status for handset O disabled 1 enabled AGCHEAD 1 Automatic Gain Control status for headset O disabled 1 enabled AGCSPKR 1 Automatic Gain Control status for Speaker O disabled 1 enabled 1 of 12 98 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range AUDASYS AUDIOENV AUDIOSTHD AUDIOSTHS AUTH BAKLIGHTOFF 3 120 System setting for audible visual alerting 1 ASCII digit from 0 to 3 If 1 or 3 user is allowed to reduce the volume to zero button clicks remain at their lowest audible setting but no audio alerting is provided If 0 or 2 user is not allowed to reduce the Ringer Click volume below the lowest audible setting If AUDASYS is set to 0 visual alerting is set to on in accordance with produ
278. ses the Message Waiting indicators at the top of telephone and left middle of the faceplate to display a broken flutter The broken flutter alternates 50 milliseconds on 50 milliseconds off for 500 milliseconds followed by 500 milliseconds off five times Then the indicators flash continuously awaiting user entry Then the 4601 makes a second registration attempt using the same extension This attempt causes the Message Waiting indicators at the top of telephone and left middle of the faceplate to display a continuous broken flutter The broken flutter alternates 50 milliseconds on 50 milliseconds off for 500 milliseconds followed by 500 milliseconds off In addition Call Appearance Line b s LED flashes continuously until either the or button Is pressed CAUSE The PBX detects an extension conflict with an existing set or Softphone RESOLUTION You can force the current telephone to register and thereby disconnect the other user by pressing The 4600 Series IP Telephone prompts you again for the extension and password If you enter the same extension and password you must confirm that you want to unregister the original user Press to unregister the original user and register the current telephone Then press to reset the telephone and enter a different extension and password If you take no action within 20 minutes the telephone attempts registration again repeating the process until either you intervene or power is lo
279. similar to the lt code gt tag but with a different contextual intent The enclosed text is shown in an italic font Logical Style Tags that control logical style provide a similar functionality to those that control content based style but they have no implicit visual characteristics or contextual meaning Instead they only provide a means of invoking a style sheet These tags like all others might have an ID and class attribute set Using style sheet rules for these class names and IDs allows the designer to provide decoration font and color styles for each section Thus these tags can be considered to be designer defined content based tags e lt div gt indicates a division A newline is inserted between the previous text and the text following the lt div gt tag No physical changes are noticeable except those implemented in style sheets e lt span gt indicates a spanned section of text is placed immediately after the text that precedes the tag with a newline No physical changes are noticeable except those implemented in style sheets 156 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Browser Features and Behavior Physical Style Physical tags are effectively the opposite of content based tags The text in a physical tag might have no meaning whatsoever outside what the designer intended These tags show text in a distinct style Physical tags usually affect font style Each physical style tag is shown with a b
280. sion 2 TFTP July 1992 by K Sollins STD 33 RFC 1350 as updated by TFTP Option Extension May 1998 by G Malkin and A Harkin RFC 2347 An Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol ARP November 1982 by David C Plummer STD 37 RFC 826 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP March 1997 by R Droms RFC 2131 DHCP Options and BOOTP Vendor Extensions March 1997 by S Alexander and R Droms RFC 2132 RTP A Transport Protocol for Real Time Applications RTP RTCP January 1996 by H Schulzrinne S Casner R Frederick V Jacobson RFC 1889 Definition of the Differentiated Services Field DS Field in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers DIFFSRV December 1998 by K Nichols S Blake F Baker and D Black RFC 2474 Introduction to version 2 of the Internet standard Network Management Framework SNMPv2 April 1993 by J Case K McCloghrie M Rose and S Waldbusser RFC 1441 Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP IP Internets MIB II March 1991 edited by K McCloghrie and M Rose RFC 1213 Issue 7 October 2007 21 Introduction SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol using SMlv2 November 1996 edited by K McCloghrie RFC 2011 Structure of Management Information Version 2 SMIv2 April 1999 edited by K McCloghrie D Perkins and J Schoenwaelder RFC 2578 Resource ReSerVation Protocol VI September 1997 by R Braden L Zhang S Berson S Herzog and S Jamin
281. splay View settings next exit 2 Press the button at any time during viewing to display the next name and system value pair from Table 15 The first pair displays again after the last pair displays Press the button at any time during viewing to terminate the procedure and restore the user interface to its previous state The names and values display in the order shown in Table 15 Issue 7 October 2007 137 Troubleshooting Guidelines Table 15 Viewing Parameter Values Name System Value Format Model 46ccDecc Up to 8 ASCII characters Model Phone SN cccccccccccc Telephone Serial Number up to 18 ASCII cccccccc characters which display on both lines PWB SN cccccccccccc Printed Wiring Board circuit board Serial cccccccc Number up to 18 ASCII characters which display on both lines Applies to all telephones with a display except 4602 4602SW 4602SW and 4610SW PWB nnnnnannnn 9 ASCII numeric characters PWBCC Applies comcode to all telephones with a display except 4602 4602SW and 4610SW PWB version ccccccccc 9 ASCII numeric characters Applies only to the 4602 4602SW 4602SW and 4610SW MAC hh hh hh hh hh hh Each octet of the MAC address displays as a address pair of hexadecimal numbers L2 tagging ccccccccc Up to 9 ASCII characters on if NVL2Q 1 off if NVL2Q 2 auto on if NVL2Q 0 and 802 1Q tagging is on and auto off if NVL2Q 0 and 802 1Q tagging i
282. st VISUAL INDICATION All LEDs are steadily lit except Call Appearance Line A which is flashing CAUSE The telephone has detected an IP Address conflict RESOLUTION DHCP restart is automatically initiated No user action required VISUAL INDICATION No LEDs flash when telephone is plugged in CAUSE Telephone is unable to communicate with the Ethernet RESOLUTION Verify the connection to the Ethernet jack verify the jack is Category 5 verify power is applied on the LAN to that jack etc 1 of 2 148 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Troubleshooting the 4601 IP Telephone Table 18 Possible Error Messages During 4601 IP Telephone Installation or Operation continued Error Message 4601 Visual Indication Cause Resolution Password VISUAL INDICATION Message Waiting indicators at top of telephone and Error left middle of faceplate display a broken flutter for a total of 5 cycles with one cycle being alternating 50 milliseconds on 50 milliseconds off for 500 milliseconds followed by 500 milliseconds off then flash continuously awaiting user entry CAUSE The PBX does not recognize the password entered RESOLUTION Confirm the password is correct then try registration again taking particular care to enter the password accurately System busy VISUAL INDICATION Message Waiting indicators at top of telephone and left middle of faceplate display a broken flutter continuously alternating 50 milliseconds on
283. stration RESOLUTION Short term Restart the application Long term Register the product or replace it with an application that does not behave this way for example Avaya s TFTP application CAUSE The system value AUTH is set to 1 HTTPS required but no valid address is specified in TLSSRVR RESOLUTION Change AUTH to 0 zero or enter a valid address for TLSSRVR 4of6 Issue 7 October 2007 129 Troubleshooting Guidelines Table 14 Some Error Conditions in Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Condition Cause Resolution The TFTP or HTTP script file is ignored AND the TFTP or HTTP server is a or not used by the LINUX or UNIX telephone system AND telephone administration recently changed Telephone power is interrupted while the telephone is saving the application file and the TFTP or HTTP application stops responding The DHCP server indicates the 4600 Series IP Telephone reports itself as a Token Ring device and refuses to provide the telephone an address Telephone does not register with Avaya Communication Manager CAUSE The telephone expects lines of the script file to terminate with a lt Carriage Return gt lt Line Feed gt Some UNIX applications only terminate lines with lt Line Feed gt Editing the script file with a UNIX based editor can strip lt Carriage Return gt s from the file Doing so causes the entire file to be treated as a comment and thus be igno
284. supports backup restore and this value is set to 1 and system value FTPSRVR is non null automatic backup and restore proceeds upon completion of telephone registration If set to 0 automatic backup restore does not occur upon registration Number of idle minutes after which the backlight turns off 1 3 ASCII digits from 0 999 4 of 4 Note Appendix C Creating Web Sites for Other 4600 Series IP Telephones provides assistance in developing local Web sites tailored to applicable IP Telephone displays The Application Status Flag APPSTAT The 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones offer the user numerous applications like Speed Dial Call Log Redial etc Each of these applications allows the user to add delete or in some cases edit entries However you as the administrator may not want the user to have that level of functionality For example a hotel lobby telephone probably should not allow a user to delete the concierge s Speed Dial number Further for privacy reasons that same telephone should not allow a Call Log display You can use the Issue 7 October 2007 121 Server Administration Application Status Flag APPSTAT to administer specific application functionality permission levels for one or more telephones APPSTAT consists of one number specifying a certain level of allowed functionality A Zero 0 value is the most limiting setting Values 2 and
285. t message SET HEADSYS 1 Audio Environment Index Enables you to customize the telephone s audio performance 0 299 This parameter affects settings for AGC dynamic range handset and headset noise reduction thresholds and headset transmit gain It is highly recommended you consult Avaya before changing this parameter SET AUDIOENV 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH WML BROWSER SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHHH This section contains the common settings used to enable and administer the Web application The settings WMLHOME which sets the URL of the telephone home page and WMLIDLEURT which sets the idle phone home page may be different for each set type to take advantage of the capabilities of the individual sets WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI should be set inthe sections for the individual set types Note The 9610 does not use WMLHOME or WMLIDLEURI Use WMLSMALL in their place Your HTTP proxy server address name or IP Address SET WMLPROXY my proxy company com The TCP port number of your HTTP proxy server SET WMLPORT 8080 Issue 7 October 2007 181 Sample Upgrade Script File H A list of one or more HTTP proxy server exception domains separated by commas without any spaces Accesses to these addresses will not go through the proxy server SET WMLEXCEPT mycompany com 135 20 21 20 H The idle period
286. t use either WMLHOME or WMLIDLEURI Use WMLSMALL in their place together with WMLIDLETIME The 9610 requires the 9610 backup restore file to populate the home page on the phone When the 9610 has been idle for WMLIDLETIME minutes there are several possible displays which may appear depending on the values of IDLEAPP in the 9610 backup restore file and WMLSMALL itself While it is possible to use one of these screens as an idle screen it is recommended that the SCREENSAVERON timer and the Avaya Screen Saver display be used for screen saver purposes See your telephone s Administrators guide for more information To change the web site that your 9610 points to remove the from the SET WMLSMALL line and replace the provided URL in the line with the URL of your site If WMLSMALL is null 9610 backup restore Main Menu WML links will not display SET WMLSMALL http www mycompany com my_screen wml HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Emergency Contact Number H HH If set this is the number dialed when the softkey labeled EMERGENCY is pressed The default is null but any valid phone number is acceptable SET PHNEMERGNUM 911 HHHHH 9610 H 323 Phone Multi Language Administration HH Issue 7 October 2007 231 Sample Upgrade Script File These settings are used to set the local display language of your 9610 H 323 te
287. tells the IP telephone whether the telephone needs to upgrade software The Avaya IP Telephones attempt to read this file whenever they reset The upgrade script file is also used to point to the settings file There are separate upgrade script files for the 4630 Telephones Note The 4630 IP Telephones have a different upgrade process than the other telephones This is because the 4630 touch screen operation is significantly more complex than any of the other Avaya IP Telephones There are some common elements between the 4630 and other IP telephones Any differences are highlighted as appropriate in this section e The settings file contains the option settings that enable many of the options you will need to customize the Avaya IP Telephones for your enterprise You can use one settings file for all your Avaya IP Telephones In addition to the upgrade script and settings files you need the latest binary code used in the Avaya IP Telephones The upgrade script file and settings file are available from the Avaya Web site The files allow you to upgrade to new software releases and new functionality without having to replace IP telephones These two files plus other useful information such as a ReadMe file information about infrared capabilities and a settings file template are contained in a self extracting executable file you download to your file server Application files for all current 4600 Series IP Telephones except the 4630 4630SW an
288. the Site Specific Option Number string Option 176 or if HTTP is to be used exclusively instead of TFTP However to simplify configuration Avaya recommends that you use Option 66 if you are using TFTP If you use both Option 66 and Option 176 to identify TFTP servers the value s in Option 176 overrides the value s in Option 66 60 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide DHCP A 4600 Series IP Telephone specific DHCP option specifying information such as TFTP server and Avaya Media Server Gatekeeper IP Addresses or SIP specific parameters such as SIPPROXYSRVR as defined in 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters Use the Site Specific Option Number SSON at 176 You can set this option value for example to either of the following strings MCI PADD XXX XXX XXX XXX MCPORT yyyy TFTPDIR lt path gt TFTPSRVR ZZZ ZZZ ZZZ ZZZ OR MCIPADD flist of DNS names MCPORT yyyy TFTPDIR lt path gt TFTPSRVR list of DNS names As of Release 2 4 also use Option 176 to identify the VLAN IDs used for the Ethernet line interface and the secondary Ethernet interface for VLAN separation In this instance if your voice VLAN ID is xxx and your data VLAN ID is yyy at a minimum add the following string to Option 176 L2Q 1 LAQVLAN Xxx PHY2VLAN yyy The following is the recommended format for VLAN separation on dynamically programmed IP telephones In this example L2Q 1 LAQVLAN XXx VLANSEP 1 PHY2VLAN
289. thenticate with a back end Authentication Server before gaining network access Applicable 4600 Series IP telephones support IEEE 802 1X as a Supplicant with the EAP MD5 authentication method Address Resolution Protocol used for example to verify that the IP Address provided by the DHCP server is not in use by another IP telephone Code Excited Linear Predictive Voice compression requiring only 16 kbps of bandwidth Control LAN type of Gatekeeper circuit pack Converged Network Analyzer an Avaya product to test and analyze network performance Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol an IETF protocol used to automate IP Address allocation and management Differentiated Services an IP based QoS mechanism Domain Name System an IETF standard for ASCII strings to represent IP Addresses 1 of 3 Issue 7 October 2007 13 Introduction EAP Gatekeeper H 323 HTTP HTTPS IETF LAN LDAP LLDP MAC Media Channel Encryption NAPT NAT OPS PAE PHP PoE PSTN QoS Registration Server RSVP RTCP RTP Extensible Application Protocol H 323 application that performs essential control administrative and managerial functions in the media server Sometimes called CLAN in Avaya documents A TCP IP based protocol for VoIP signaling Hypertext Transfer Protocol used to request and transmit pages on the World Wide Web A secure version of HTTP Internet Engineering Task Force the organizati
290. ther DHCP application might work It is the customer s responsibility to install and configure the DHCP server correctly This document is limited to describing a generic administration that works with the 4600 Series IP Telephones 58 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide DHCP DHCP Generic Setup This document is limited to describing a generic administration that works with the 4600 Series IP Telephones Three DHCP software alternatives are common to Windows operating systems e Windows NT 4 0 DHCP Server e Windows 2003 DHCP Server e Windows 2000 DHCP Server Any other DHCP application might work It is the responsibility of the customer to install and configure the DHCP server correctly DHCP server setup involves 1 Installing the DHCP server software according to vendor instructions 2 Configuring the DHCP server with e IP Addresses available for the 4600 Series IP Telephones e The following DHCP options Option 1 Subnet mask As described in Table 3 item 3 Option 3 Gateway router IP Address es As described in Table 3 item 1 If using more than one address the total list can contain up to 255 total ASCII characters You must separate IP Addresses with commas with no intervening spaces Option 6 DNS server s address list If using more than one address the total list can contain up to 127 total ASCII characters You must separate IP Addresses with commas with no interveni
291. there are two messaging systems and two registration proxy servers for a total of four possible combinations These sample GROUP assignments are unique to the SIP users Other GROUP assignments could be in the same file for other purposes IF GROUP SEQ 10 goto GROUP10 IF GROUP SEQ 20 goto GROUP20 Issue 7 October 2007 81 Server Administration IF GROUP SEQ 30 goto GROUP30 IF GROUP SEQ 40 goto GROUP40 specify settings unique to Group 0 goto END GROUP10 specify settings unique to Group 10 for example SET COVERAGEADDR 22000 SET SIPPROXYSRVR IP Address of serverl1 SET SIPREGISTRAR IP Address of serverl1 goto END GROUP20 specify settings unique to Group 20 for example SET COVERAGEADDR 23000 SET SIPPROXYSRVR IP Address of serverl1 SET SIPREGISTRAR IP Address of serverl1 goto END GROUP30 specify settings unique to Group 30 for example SET COVERAGEADDR 22000 SET SIPPROXYSRVR IP Address of server2 SET SIPREGISTRAR IP Address of server2 goto END GROUP40 specify settings unique to Group 40 for example SET COVERAGEADDR 23000 SET SIPPROXYSRVR IP Address of server2 SET SIPREGISTRAR IP Address of server2 goto END END specify settings common to all Groups QoS The 4600 Series IP Telephones support both IEEE 802 1D Q and DiffServ Other network based QoS initiatives such as UDP port selection do not require support by the telephones Those initiatives
292. tions and non password parameters Setting Parameter Name Type Idle Timeout Option Keyboard Layout Option Click Feedback Option Edit Dialing Option Personalized Ring Option Redial Option Go to Phone on Incoming Calls Option Go to Phone on Originate Option Call Timer Option Alphabetize Entries Option Call Log Active Option Call Log Automatic Archive Option Directory User ID Parameter Automatic Backup Option FTP Server IP Address Parameter FTP Directory Path Parameter FTP User ID Parameter Stock Ticker Active Option STK mm Parameter Stock Index DJIA Option Stock Index S amp P 500 Option Stock Index Nasdaq Option Stock Change Option Stock Volume Option 116 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Customizing the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone If the Automatic Backup option is set to No Speed Dial data Options and Parameter settings are not saved However the user can force a one time backup via the appropriate option See Chapter 8 of the 4630 IP Telephone User Guide for information Restoring backed up data is a separate user option also covered in Chapter 8 of the 4630 IP Telephone User Guide Note For specific error messages relating to Backup Restore see Table 17 Possible Error Messages During 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW and 4630 4630SW Backup Restore on page 147 Call Log Archive Automatic archiving of the Call Log occurs when e The Call Log Automatic Archive option setting is Y
293. to 0 the telephone continues using the IP Address until it detects reset or a conflict see DHCP Generic Setup 3 of 12 100 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Administering Options for the 4600 Series IP Telephones Table 10 4600 Series IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Description and Value Range DIALPLAN DIALWAIT DNSSRVR DOMAIN DOT1X DSTOFFSET Null Null Null The Dial Plan for SIP telephones Valid values are zero to 1000 of the following ASCII characters 0 i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a X Z Z lf clas See Setting the Dial Plan on SIP IP Telephones on page 112 for specific guidelines Dialing Timeout Interval for SIP telephones Valid values are one or two ASCII numeric digits O to 10 This parameter controls how many seconds the telephone waits after each dialable character is dialed If an appropriate dial plan has not been defined the SIP telephone assumes the number is complete and initiates a call when the timeout interval is reached Text string containing the IP Address of one or more DNS servers at least one of which must be a valid non zero dotted decimal address Text string containing the domain name to be used when DNS names in system values are resolved into IP Addresses 802 1X Supplicant operation mode Valid values are 0 Unicast Supplicant operation only with PAE multi
294. to administer a switch with Avaya Communication Manager software This document is provided with the Avaya Communication Manager Release 1 2 product e Avaya Communication Manager Documentation Release 1 3 This document describes how to administer a switch with Avaya Communication Manager software This document is provided with the Avaya Communication Manager Release 1 3 product e Avaya Communication Manager Documentation Release 2 0 This document describes how to administer a switch with Avaya Communication Manager software This document is provided with the Avaya Communication Manager Release 2 0 product e Avaya Communication Manager Documentation Release 2 1 This document describes how to administer a switch with Avaya Communication Manager software This document is provided with the Avaya Communication Manager Release 2 1 product Issue 7 October 2007 17 Introduction e Avaya Communication Manager Documentation Release 2 2 This document describes how to administer a switch with Avaya Communication Manager software This document is provided with the Avaya Communication Manager Release 2 2 product e Avaya Communication Manager Documentation Release 3 0 This document describes how to administer a switch with Avaya Communication Manager software This document is provided with the Avaya Communication Manager Release 3 0 product e Avaya Communication Manager Documentation Release 3 12 This document describes how to a
295. to do this for VLANTEST seconds e f the VLANTEST timer expires and L2Q 1 the telephone sets L2QVLAN 0 and transmits DHCP messages with the default VLAN 0 e f the VLANTEST timer expires and L2Q 0 the telephone sets L2QVLAN 0 and transmits DHCP messages without tagging e If VLANTEST is 0 the timer will never expire Issue 7 October 2007 89 Server Administration Note Regardless of the setting of L2Q VLANTEST or L2QVLAN you must have DHCP administered so that the telephone will get a response to a DHCPDISCOVER when it makes that request on the default 0 VLAN After VLANTEST expires if an Avaya IP Telephone running R2 6 receives a non zero L2QVLAN value the telephone will release the IP Address and send DHCPDISCOVER on that VLAN Any other release will require a manual reset before the telephone will attempt to use a VLAN on which VLANTEST has expired See the Reset procedure in Chapter 3 of the 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide The telephone ignores any VLAN ID administered on the media server if a non zero VLAN ID is administered either by LLDP manually through DHCP and or through TFTP or HTTP VLAN Separation In Releases 2 4 and 2 6 VLAN separation is available to control priority tagging from the device on the secondary Ethernet typically PC data The following system parameters control VLAN separation e VLANSEP enables 1 or disables 0 VLAN separation e PHY2VLAN pro
296. to identify duplicate IP Address es CAUSE A device between the telephone and the call server is invoking Network Address Port Translation which the 4600 Series IP Telephones do not support RESOLUTION Remove or re administer the NAPT device or move the telephone CAUSE When first plugged in the IP telephone is unable to communicate with the Ethernet RESOLUTION Verify the connection to the Ethernet jack verify the jack is Category 5 etc Note that if the telephone is attached to a 30A switched hub upon loss of Ethernet connectivity the usual No Ethernet message is not displayed CAUSE The IP Address of the Phone and file server in the IP telephone s memory is all zeroes RESOLUTION Depending on the specific requirements of your network this may not be an error If appropriate either administer the DHCP server with the proper address of the file server or administer the telephone locally using the ADDR option The 4600 Series IP Telephone Installation Guide explains the ADDR option CAUSE The telephone has registered with the call server but network problems have prevented the telephone from opening a TCP socket Note This message only occurs on older software versions Telephones with newer software automatically reset RESOLUTION Investigate the network problem normally CAUSE Most likely the number of IP endpoints on the Avaya Media Server is already at maximum Less likely network resource is unavai
297. to static addresses were entered correctly CAUSE Loss of path to Avaya Media Server DHCP Lease expired or DHCP server not available when telephone attempts to renegotiate DHCP lease RESOLUTION As above Note that if the telephone is attached to a 30A switched hub upon loss of Ethernet connectivity the usual No Ethernet message is not displayed 1 of 6 126 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Error Conditions Table 14 Some Error Conditions in Operation of 4600 Series IP Telephones continued Condition Cause Resolution The telephone was working but does not work now AND no lights are lit on the telephone and the display is not lit AND power to the telephone is fine but there is no dial tone The display might show System Busy AND the telephone was recently moved AND the network was recently changed to upgrade or replace servers re administer the Avaya Media Server add or change NAT etc CAUSE Loss of power RESOLUTION Check the connections between the telephone the power supply and the power jack CAUSE Loss of communication with the PBX switch RESOLUTION Check LAN continuity from the PBX to the telephone using ARP or trace route and from the telephone to the PBX by invoking a Feature button Verify that LAN administration has not changed for the Gatekeeper TN 2302AP circuit packs or the LAN equipment routers servers etc between the swit
298. tober 2007 237 Sample Upgrade Script File HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Emergency Contact Number H HH If set this is the number dialed when the softkey labeled EMERGENCY is pressed The default is null but any valid phone number is acceptable SET PHNEMERGNUM 911 HHHHHH 9630 H 323 Phone Multi Language Administration HH These settings are used to set the local display language of your 9630 H 323 telephone First Language File Name Contains the name of the first language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt Note It is recommended you install the latest version of the language files in all 96xx H 323 telephones even if some phones are running an earlier release of software SET LANG1FILE mlf_s12_v10_russian txt Second Language File Name Contains the name of the second language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG2FILE mif_s12_v10_spanish txt HE Third Language File Name Contains the name of the third language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSFILE mlf_s12_v10_french_paris txt Fourth Language File Name Contains the name of the fourth language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG4FILE mif_s12_v10_german txt System Wide Language Contains the name of the de
299. tring is specified for all SNMP messages sent by the telephone As of Release 1 8 dialpad access to Local Administration Procedures such as specifying IP Addresses is restricted by a password Dialpad access to most Local Administration Procedures was removed The end user s ability to use a telephone Options application to view network data is restricted Issue 7 October 2007 45 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols 46 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Chapter 3 Requirements Introduction The 4600 Series IP Telephones use Internet Protocol IP technology with Ethernet line interfaces The IP telephones supplement the existing Avaya IP Solutions platform This feature provides the user with the capability to natively administer and maintain new 4600 Series IP Telephones The 4600 Series IP Telephones provide support for DHCP TFTP and HTTP over IPv4 UDP which enhance the administration and servicing of the phones These phones use DHCP to obtain dynamic IP Addresses and TFTP or HTTP to download new versions of software for the phones Using either a built in hub or a switched port the 4600 Series IP Telephones offer one desktop connection for both the telephone set and the PC Note In all cases references to Avaya Communication Manager or CM apply only to 4600 Series IP Telephones supporting H 323 Hardware Requirements Before plugging in the 4600 Series IP Telephone v
300. ts services or information described or offered within them We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availability of the linked pages Warranty Avaya Inc provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty In addition Avaya s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this product while under warranty is available through the following Web site http Awww avaya com support Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise the Product is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights Unauthorized reproduction transfer and or use can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Avaya support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your product The support telephone number is 1 800 242 2121 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http Awww avaya com support Software License USE OR INSTALLATION OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES THE END USER S ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN AND THE GENERAL LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE AT http support avaya com Licenselnfo GENERAL LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE PRODUCT S TO THE POINT OF PURCHASE WITHIN TEN
301. ty is trying to call and where the called party is on the network Traditional telephony uses terminals with fixed addresses Traditional telephony establishes a fixed connection for the communication session between two such terminals allocating fixed bandwidth resources for the duration of the call IP communications constitute a connectionless network having neither fixed addresses nor fixed connections Issue 7 October 2007 25 Overview of Voice over IP VoIP and Network Protocols e Addressing a unique address that must identify each terminal on a network In a voice network the unique address is a permanent attribute based on any combination of international numbering plans national numbering plans local telephone company practices internal customer specific codes In IP communications dial plans track extension numbers assigned to terminals No fixed connection path is needed e Routing related to addressing and allows connections to be established between endpoints Although these functions are common to data and voice networks the implementations differ Delay and Jitter Data traffic is usually short and comes in bursts Data networks like the Internet are designed to manage these bursts of traffic from many sources on a first come first served basis Data packets are sent to multiple destinations often without any attempt to keep them in a particular order Voice networks are designed for conti
302. ult is LSunOct2L see the 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Admin Guide for format and setting alternatives H GMTOFFSET sets the time zone the phone should use The default is 5 00 see the 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Admin Guide for format and setting alternatives H SIP Settings Examples SET REGISTERWAIT 3600 SET SIPDOMAIN avaya com SET SIPPROXYSRVR 192 168 0 8 SET SIPPORT 5060 SET SPEAKERSTAT 2 SET DSCPAUD 46 SET DSCPSIG 34 SET SNTPSRVR 192 168 0 5 SET DSTOFFSET 1 SET DSTSTART 2SunMar2L SET DSTSTOP 1SunNov2L SET GMTOFFSET 5 00 H TEPER PETE TEE ETE TEE ET TEETER ATE ETE TEE a HH 46xx SIP SETTINGS HE Settings applicable only to 46xx telephone models running the SIP protocol HH PEPER PEER TREE EE TEE ET TEETER BEE AE BETA EEE A CALLFWDSTAT sets the call forwarding mode of the set by summing the values below 1 Permits unconditional call forwarding 2 Permits call forward on busy 4 Permits call forward no answer A value of 0 disables call forwarding The default is 0 Example a value of 6 allows Call Forwarding on HH busy and on no answer H CALLFWDDELAY sets the number of ring cycles before the 200 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide H HH HH HH HH H HH HH H HH HH H H HH HH H HH H HH H HH HH HH HH HH HH HH H HH HH HH
303. ult is null but any valid phone number is acceptable SET PHNEMERGNUM 911 HHHHHH 9640 H 323 Phone Multi Language Administration HH 240 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide These settings are used to set the local display language of your 9640 H 323 telephone HH First Language File Name Contains the name of the first language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt HH Note It is recommended you install the latest version of the language files in all 96xx H 323 telephones even if some phones are running an earlier release of software HH SET LANG1FILE mlf_s12_v10_russian txt HH Second Language File Name Contains the name of the second language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG2FILE mif_s12_v10_spanish txt Third Language File Name Contains the name of the third language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSFILE mlf_s12_v10_french_paris txt Fourth Language File Name Contains the name of the fourth language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANG4FILE mif_s12_v10_german txt System Wide Language Contains the name of the default system language file 0 to 32 ASCII characters File name must end in txt SET LANGSYS mlf_s12_v10_german txt Larger Text Fo
304. updating the display can be an issue For these reasons we recommend keeping images to a minimum The image tags that can be used on the browser are e lt img gt displays an image e lt map gt display a client side image Client side images have shaped regions called areas These areas are tied to URLs or ECMAScript functions Clicking on an area in a region executes the ECMAScript function e lt area gt defines an area in a lt map gt image Each area uses the href attribute to define a URL to jump to or an ECMAScript to execute when that area is clicked See the Design Guidelines on page 163 for information on displaying images Links As of Release 1 8 the 4630 4630SW IP Telephones support dialing from hyperlinks To dial from a link a given link s href attribute value must of the form tel nnnnn or javascript dial nnnnm Selecting that link passes the characters nnnnn to the 4630 4630SW Phone application for direct dialing Hyperlinks are the heart of the Web browser s power The link allows the user to e click text or an image to jump to another Web site e click text or an image to jump to another page within this site or e click text or an image to jump to another area on a page Although URLs allow you to use various protocols use only HTTP and HTTPS for the 4630 IP Telephone Web Browser Issue 7 October 2007 159 Creating Web Sites for the 4630 4630SW IP Telephone e lt a gt specifies the full or
305. upported transport protocol or port may be ignored 2 A Destination Unreachable DU message with a code of 2 Protocol Unreachable is transmitted if the designated transport protocol is not supported and a DU with a code of 3 Port Unreachable is transmitted if a closed TCP or UDP port is designated 4600 Series IP Telephones might limit the number of such messages are transmitted per second Additional messages designating an unsupported transport protocol or port may be ignored ICMPRED 0 Internet Control Message Protocol Redirect message support Valid values are 0 Received redirect messages are not supported 1 Received redirect messages supported Note that redirect messages are never transmitted IRSTAT 1 Text string containing status of Infrared interface O off disabled 1 on enabled L2Q 0 802 1Q framing value O auto 1 0n 2 off L2QAUD 6 Layer 2 audio priority value 0 to 7 L2QSIG 6 Layer 2 audio priority value 0 to 7 L2QVLAN 0 802 1Q VLAN Identifier 0 to 4094 MCPORT 1719 Media server transport layer port number 0 65535 Applies only to H 323 telephones Applies only to pre 2 6 software releases MUSICSRVR Null Music Server IP Addresses for SIP telephones Valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS name format separated by commas without any intervening spaces 0 to 255 ASCII characters including commas Null is a valid value but the value may not contain
306. upports only one signaling protocol at a time You must therefore ensure that the proper application files the software that runs in the telephone are sent to the appropriate telephones For information on downloading the software to the telephones see Choosing the Right Application File and Upgrade Script File later in this chapter In general H 323 and SIP telephones use the same administration mechanisms with the exception that H 323 phones get some telephony administration from the Avaya call server If you intend to mix H 323 and SIP telephones on the same network you can use common information in either DHCP or in a common script file for those settings common to both types of sets Because settings not applicable to a given telephone set are ignored you can send SIP specific settings to an H 323 telephone and H 323 settings to a SIP telephone without creating problems 54 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Administering 4600 Series IP Telephones on Avaya Media Servers H 323 Only Administering 4600 Series IP Telephones on Avaya Media Servers H 323 Only DEFINITY Releases 9 9 5 10 and Avaya Communication Manager Software Release 1 1 DEFINITY Releases 9 and 9 5 provide support for the 4606 4612 and 4624 IP Telephones DEFINITY Release 10 adds support for the 4630 and 4630SW IP Telephones Avaya Communication Manager Software Release 1 1 adds support for the 4602 4602SW and 4620 4620SW IP Telephones
307. ush Feature e As of Release 2 8 4600 Series IP Telephones support IETF RFC 1948 Defending Against Sequence Number Attacks e As of Release 2 7 the 4602SW and 4625SW IP Telephones support IEEE 802 1X as a Supplicant with the EAP MD5 authentication method The functionality is identical to other 4600 Series SW IP Telephones supporting this feature 44 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Suggestions for Installation and Configuration As of Release 2 6 the 4610SW 4620SW 4621SW and 4622SW IP Telephones support IEEE 802 1X as a Supplicant with the EAP MD5 authentication method The modes supported are as follows Unicast Supplicant operation only with PAE multicast pass through with and without proxy Logoff and Unicast or multicast Supplicant operation without PAE multicast pass through or proxy Logoff Note The 4601 and 4601 IP Telephones do not support 802 1X as a Supplicant As of Release 2 6 SNMP is disabled by default You must enable SNMP through DHCP or the 46xxsettings file As of Release 2 3 4600 Series IP Telephones support VLAN separation As of Release 2 3 4600 Series H 323 IP Telephones support signaling channel encryption while registering and when registered with appropriately administered Avaya Media Servers As of Release 2 0 a 4600 Series IP Telephone s response to SNMP queries is restricted to only IP Addresses on a list you specify As of Release 2 0 an SNMP community s
308. vice TTS aaan 33 Issue 7 October 2007 3 Contents Registration and Authentication 1 6 002 ee eee ee WAN Considerations scosi 8 fd GOR SOTTO SEER OOS OS Initialization Process ssec oc esses oe eer Sheed Sees oReede cee Step 1 Telephone to Network 2 20 ee eee ee eee es Step 2 DHCP Server to Telephone 2 20 eee eee eee Step 3 Telephone and File Server 2 0022 eee eee ee Step 4 Telephone and the Call Server 2 0002 eee enue TEPID Por DUNZHION 4 4464 VR eRe HODDER SEWER OES Suggestions for Installation and Configuration 025886s Reliability and Performance 2 2 eee ee IP Address Lists and Station Number Portability SECUTI 6 5 4 5 ee ee a a a Chapter 3 Requirements 0 00080 eee eee eee INGOGUCHON 6 oA OER OER Ow ORS ES wR A Hardware Requirements 2 2 eee Additional Hardware Requirements 2 006 ee ee eee ee es Software Requirements 1 0 ee ee Chapter 4 Server Administration 0 00002 wees IMMOGUCHON baa eek ee ee Re OO ee Se OO Parameter Data Precedence 2 2 00 ee eee eee eee es Administering H 323 and SIP IP Telephones on the Same Network Administering 4600 Series IP Telephones on Avaya Media Servers H 323 Only DEFINITY Releases 9 9 5 10 and Avaya Communication Manager Software Release 1 14 250 5 DEFINITY Release 8 4 0 000 eee ee ee ee ee DHCP and Fi
309. vides the VLAN ID for tagged frames received on the secondary Ethernet interface e PHY2PRIO the layer 2 priority value to be used for tagged frames received on the secondary Ethernet interface 90 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide VLAN Considerations Table 7 provides several VLAN separation guidelines Table 7 VLAN Separation Rules If Then VLANSEP is 0 Disabled OR the telephone is not tagging frames OR the telephone is tagging frames with a VLAN ID equal to PHY2VLAN VLANSEP is 1 Enabled VLANSEP is 1 Enabled VLANSEP is 1 Enabled AND the telephone is not tagging frames OR if the telephone is tagging frames with a VLAN ID equal to PHY2VLAN OR if the PHY2VLAN value is zero AND the telephone is tagging frames with a VLAN ID not equal to PHY2VLAN AND the PHY2VLAN value is not zero Frames received on the secondary Ethernet interface will not be changed before forwarding For example tagging is not added or removed and the VLAN ID and tagged frames priority are not changed The Ethernet switch forwarding logic determines that frames received on the Ethernet line interface are forwarded to the secondary Ethernet interface or to the telephone without regard to specific VLAN IDs or the existence of tags All tagged frames received on the secondary Ethernet interface are changed before forwarding to make the VLAN ID equal to the PHY2VLAN
310. way speaker also called monitor allowed 2 two way speaker allowed The default is 2 DSCPAUD Sets the DiffServ value for audio streams from the phone The default is 46 and valid values are 0 63 DSCPSIG Sets the DiffServ value for signaling protocol messages from the phone The default is 34 and valid values are 0 63 SNTP settings are used to configure SNTP related parameters SNTP is only supported on SIP telephones HH H HH H H H HH HH HH H H H HH H HH HH H HH HH HH HH HH HH SNTPSRVR sets the IP Address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN of the SNTP server s to be used The default is null but valid values are zero or more IP Addresses in dotted decimal or DNS format separated by commas without intervening spaces to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters DSTOFFSET sets the daylight savings time adjustment value The default is 1 but valid values are 0 1 or 2 DSTSTART sets the beginning day for daylight savings time The default is 1SunApr2L see the 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Admin Guide for format and setting alternatives NOTE Starting in March 2007 the default values for DSTSTART and DSTSTOP on 46xx SIP phones are obsolete for the United States and Canada and must be changed via revised values in this file as indicated in the examples below Issue 7 October 2007 199 Sample Upgrade Script File DSTSTOP sets the ending day for daylight savings time The defa
311. x levels softer than NORMAL 8 one level louder than NORMAL 9 two levels louder than NORMAL SET AUDIOSTHD 0 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE WML BROWSER SETTINGS HHHHHHHHHHH The WMLHOME setting is used to enable and administer the Web Application The WMLIDLEURI setting acts as an idle screen when the phone has been idle see WMLIDLETIME value By default this URL is NULL and this screen is not activated NOTE Avaya hosts a web site for IP Phones The WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI parameters are set up to point your IP telephones to this hosted site Issue 7 October 2007 225 Sample Upgrade Script File To enable access to this site remove the from the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDLEUR lines To change the web site that your phones point to replace the provided URL in the SET WMLHOME and SET WMLIDELURI lines with the URL of your site SET WMLHOME http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4620 home wml SET WMLIDLEURI http support avaya com elmodocs2 avayaip 4620 idle wml GOTO END HHHHHHHHHHHHHE END OF 4622 IP Phone Settings HHHHHH ERE ARE EAE ERE EAE AE EE EE AE EA A SETTINGS4625 FERRE EERE EAE EAE EAE AEE EEA EE H This section contains the phone model specific settings for the 4625 telephone H HHHHHHHHHH HAHAH AUDIO SETTINGS HHHHHHHHAHHHHAHH H Headset Sidetone Controls th
312. xt string containing the IP Address in dotted decimal or DNS format of an HTTP proxy server This parameter is optional if the Web pages a user accesses are all on your organization s intranet 3 of 4 120 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Customizing 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephones Table 12 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW and 4625SW IP Telephone Customizable System Parameters continued Parameter Name Default Value Status Description and Value Range Backup Restore Parameters BRURI Null Optional FTPSRVR Null Mandatory but can be user specified HTTPDIR Null Optional HTTPPORT 80 Optional RESTORESTAT 1 Mandatory but can be user specified Backlight Parameters BAKLIGHTOFF 120 Optional If backup restore is supported this is the URI used for backup and restore of user data to HTTP file server 0 to 255 ASCII numeric digits zero or one URI Text string containing the 4 octet IP Address for the FTP server that stores and retrieves 4610SW 4620 4620SW 4621SW 4622SW 4625SW user information See The Application Status Flag APPSTAT on page 121 Path name prepended to all file names used in HTTP and HTTPS GET operations 0 to 127 ASCII characters Configurable TCP port number used for HTTP file downloading from non Avaya servers 2 to 5 ASCII numeric digits from 80 to 65535 FTP backup restore file status If the telephone
313. ya Proprietary Avaya Proprietary Avaya Proprietary Avaya Proprietary Avaya Proprietary Basic Mandatory Name PoE Conservation Level Support Call Server IP Address IP Phone Addresses CNA Server IP Address File Server 802 1Q Framing End of LLDPDU Provides Power Conservation abilities settings Typical and Maximum Power values OUI 00 40 0D hex Subtype 1 Call Server IP Address Subtype 3 Phone IP Address Phone Address Mask Gateway IP Address Subtype 4 CNA Server IP Address in use value from CNASRVR Subtype 5 File Server IP Address Subtype 6 802 1Q Framing 1 if tagging or 2 if not Subtype 7 Not applicable 2 of 2 96 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP On receipt of a LLDPDU message the Avaya IP Telephones will act on these Type Length Value TLV elements Table 9 Impact of TLVs on System Parameter Values System Parameter Name TLV Name Impact PHY2VLAN L2QVLAN and L2Q MCIPADD TLSSRVR HTTPSRVR and TFTPSRVR L2Q IEEE 802 1 Port VLAN ID IEEE 802 1 VLAN Name Proprietary Call Server TLV Proprietary File Server TLV Proprietary 802 1Q Framing Proprietary PoE Conservation TLV System value changed to the Port VLAN identifier in the TLV The system value is changed to the TLV VLAN Identifier L2Q will be set to 1 ON VLAN Name TLV is only effe
314. you do not want to reset the system values press no and proceed to Step 4 Pressing the pound sign to reset the system values on a 4601 IP Telephone produces a confirmation tone The 4601 s Message Waiting indicators illuminate but do not flash to indicate no entry is allowed while the system values are being reset All other phones display a screen with the following prompt on the top line Are you sure no yes Press the button to continue without resetting the values and proceed to Step 4 Or press the button to reset values to their defaults If the telephone already has an IP Address that was obtained through DHCP the telephone transmits a DHCPRELEASE message All phones except the 4601 display the following text left justified at the top of the display while the system values are reset to defaults Resetting values The telephone resets from the beginning of registration which takes a few minutes If you do not reset the telephone all IP telephones except the 4601 display the following prompt Restart phone no yes Press the key to terminate the procedure without restarting the telephone Otherwise press and follow the next procedure to restart the telephone Issue 7 October 2007 135 Troubleshooting Guidelines Restart the Telephone Use the following procedure to restart the telephone 1 While the telephone is on hook and idle press the followin
315. ystem parameter DHCPSTD allows an administrator to specify that the telephone will either Comply with the DHCP standard by setting DHCPSTD to 1 or Continue to use its IP Address after the DHCP lease expires by setting DHCPSTD to 0 The latter case is the default If the default is invoked after the DHCP lease expires the telephone sends an ARP Request for its own IP Address every five seconds The request continues either forever or until the telephone receives an ARP Reply After receiving an ARP Reply the telephone displays an error message sets its IP Address to 0 0 0 0 and attempts to contact the DHCP server again Option 52 Overload Option if desired If this option is received in a message the telephone interprets the sname and file fields in accordance with RFC 2132 Section 9 3 Option 58 DHCP lease renew time if desired If not received or if this value is greater than that for Option 51 the default value of T1 renewal timer is used as per RFC 2131 Section 4 5 Option 59 DHCP lease rebind time if desired If not received or if this value is greater than that for Option 51 the default value of T2 rebinding timer is used as per RFC 2131 Section 4 5 Option 66 TFTP Server Name Applicable to H 323 only Note Microsoft DHCP servers support only dotted decimal format for file server addresses not symbolic names Option 66 need not be used if the TFTP server is identified in
316. z zzz zzz and a second TFTP server at address tttpserver yourco com in the string value enter Z2ZZ ZZZ ZZZ Z2ZZ tftpserver yourco com In the left pane of the DHCP right click the DHCP Server name then click Set Predefined Options 6 Under Predefined Options and Values click Add 7 In the Option Type Name field enter any appropriate name for example Avaya IP Telephones 8 Change the Data Type to String 9 In the Code field enter 176 then click the OK button twice 10 11 12 13 The Predefined Options and Values dialog box closes leaving the DHCP dialog box enabled Expand the newly created scope to reveal its Scope Options Click Scope Options and select Action gt Configure Options from the menu In the General tab page under the Available Options check the Option 176 checkbox In the Data Entry box enter the DHCP IP telephone option string as described in DHCP Generic Setup on page 59 Note You can enter the text string directly on the right side of the Data Entry box under the ASCII label 70 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator Guide TFTP H 323 Only 14 From the list in Available Options check option 003 Router 15 Enter the gateway router IP Address from the IP Address field of Table 3 Required Network Information Before Installation Per DHCP Server 16 Click the Add button 17 Click the OK button Activating the New Scope Us

Avaya 4600 Series IP Telephone Administrator's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents